2018 Infiniti QX60 Type A GOM Owner'


OWNER’S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
FOREWORD
READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many kilometers
(miles) of driving pleasure. Please read through
this manual before operating your vehicle.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “Warranty Information
and Maintenance Booklet” explains details
about maintaining and servicing your vehicle.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS!
An INFINITI retailer knows your vehicle best.
When you require any service or have any
questions, they will be glad to assist you with
the extensive resources available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options, your
vehicle may also be equipped with additional
accessories installed prior to delivery. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.
It is important that you familiarize yourself
with all disclosures, warnings, cautions and
instructions concerning proper use of such
accessories prior to operating the vehicle
and/or accessory. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for details concerning the particular accessories with which
your vehicle is equipped.
WARNING
Follow these important driving rules to help
ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you
and your passengers!
∙ NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or
taking other actions that could distract
you.
∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
∙ ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
For descriptions specified for all-wheel drive
models, an AWD mark is placed at the beginning of the applicable sections/items.
As with other vehicles with features for offroad use, failure to operate all-wheel drive
models correctly may result in loss of control
or an accident. For additional information,
refer to “Driving safety precautions” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car
because it has a higher center of gravity
for off-road use. As with other vehicles
with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or an accident.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
For additional information, refer to “Onpavement and off-road driving
precautions”, “Avoiding collision and rollover” and “Driving safety precautions” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance,
safety, emissions or durability and may
even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not
be covered under INFINITI warranties.
This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you
may find some information that does not
apply to your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the
time of printing. INFINITI reserves the right
to change specifications or design at any time
without notice.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moderate
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures
must be followed carefully.
APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to the
front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.
INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE
PROGRAM (Mexico only)
INFINITI CARES . . .
Both INFINITI and your INFINITI retailer are
dedicated to serving all your automotive
needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle
and your INFINITI retailer are our primary
concerns. Your INFINITI retailer is always
available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
© 2017 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form,
or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without
the prior written permission of Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd.
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone
number
– Vehicle identification number
(on dash panel)
– Date of purchase
However, if there is something that your
INFINITI retailer cannot assist you with or
you would like to provide INFINITI directly
with comments or questions, please contact
our (INFINITI’s) Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:
– Current odometer reading
For Mexican customers
01-800-546-3464
or via e-mail at:
cacinfiniti@nrfm.com.mx
– Your INFINITI retailer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
0
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4
Starting and driving
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8
Technical and consumer information
9
Index
10
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1.
2.
3.
Folding 3rd row bench (P. 1-2)
Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2)
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
(P. 1-47)
4. Head restraints (P.1-11)
5. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s)
and shoulder height adjuster
(P. 1-16, 1-47)
6. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P.1-47)
7. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-47)
8. Front seats (P. 1-2)
9. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-47)
10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) (P. 1-26)
11. 2nd row seat top tether strap anchor (located on bottom of seatback)
(P. 1-26)
12. 3rd row bench seat top tether strap
anchor (located on bottom of seatback) (P. 1-26)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2420
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
EXTERIOR FRONT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Engine hood (P. 3-22)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-35)
Windshield (P. 8-21)
Power windows (P. 2-63)
Door locks (P. 3-4)
INFINITI Intelligent Key (P. 3-7)
Keys (P. 3-2)
6. Mirrors (P. 3-33)
Side view camera (P. 4-3)
7. Tire pressure (P. 8-31)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-31)
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-39)
Daytime running lights system
(P. 2-39)
9. Fog light switch (P. 2-39)
10. Front sonar sensors (P. 5-146)
11. Front camera (P. 4-3)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2497
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.
3.
4
5.
6.
Rear wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-35)
Liftgate release (P. 3-23)
Rearview camera (P.4-3)
Rear sonar sensors (P. 5-146)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-29)
Fuel information (P. 9-2)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-29)
Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2418
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Power moonroof (P. 2-66, 2-67)
Console box (P. 2-56)
Map lights (P. 2-71)
Sun visors (P. 3-32)
Glove box (P. 2-56)
Cup holders (P. 2-56)
Luggage hooks (P. 2-56)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2419
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
LII2421
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Vent (P. 4-32)
Headlight/fog light/turn signal
switch (P. 2-39)
3.
Instrument brightness control
(P. 2-39)
4.
Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)
Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-8)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-16)
5.
Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-47)
Horn (P. 2-45)
6.
Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI)
system switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-60)
7.
Twin trip odometer reset switch
(P. 2-5)
8.
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-35)
Rear wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-35)
9.
Vent (P. 4-32)
10. Rear window defogger switch
(P. 2-38)
11. Center display/Navigation system*
12. Automatic heater and air conditioning controls (P. 4-33)
13. Vent (P. 4-32)
14. Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-47)
15. Vent (P. 4-32)
16. Glove box (P. 2-56)
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Center multi-function control
buttons*
Power outlet (P. 2-52)
Audio system controls*
Shift lever (P. 5-18)
Front passenger air bag status light
(P.1-47)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
Ignition switch (P. 5-13)
Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-76)
Intelligent Cruise Control main/set
switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-78)
Dynamic Driver Assistance switch (if
so equipped) (P. 5-32, 5-48, 5-99)
Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-31)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System*
Steering wheel switch for audio
control*
Hood release (P. 3-22)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
OFF switch (P. 2-49)
Power inverter switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)
Liftgate release switch (P. 3-23)
31.
Power liftgate main switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)
Warning Systems switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)
Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-16)
*: Refer to the separate Infiniti InTouchTM
Owner’s Manual.
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
VQ35DE engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 8-13)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)
Drive belt location (P.8-18)
Fuse box (P. 8-24)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)
Air cleaner (P. 8-20)
Fuse box (P. 8-24)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-24)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-24)
Battery (P. 8-16)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LDI2498
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
VQ35DD engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 8-13)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)
Drive belt location (P.8-18)
Fuse box (P. 8-24)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)
Air cleaner (P. 8-20)
Fuse box (P. 8-24)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-24)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-24)
Battery (P. 8-16)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LDI3012
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning
light
Name
Page
Warning
light
Name
Page
Indicator
light
Name
Page
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
2-9
Speed [120 km/h
(75 mph)] warning
light (if so equipped)
2-12
High beam indicator light (blue)
2-13
Brake
warning light
2-9
Supplemental air
bag warning light
2-13
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
2-14
Charge
warning light
2-10
Name
Page
Security
indicator light
2-14
Forward Emergency
Braking (FEB) with
Pedestrian Detection
system warning light
(if so equipped)
2-10
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) position
indicator light
2-13
Side light and
headlight indicator
light (green)
2-14
Slip indicator light
2-14
Low tire pressure
warning light
(if so equipped)
2-10
Front fog light
indicator light
2-13
Master
warning light
2-12
2-13
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
2-15
Front passenger
air bag status light
2-12
2-13
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-12
High beam assist
indicator light
(green) (if so
equipped)
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC)
OFF indicator light
2-15
Power steering
warning light
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
Indicator
light
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2nd row bench seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
3rd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Armrests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Adjustable head restraint components . . . . . . . .1-12
Non-adjustable head restraint
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Removable (without Dual Head Restraint
DVD System only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Folding head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Pre-crash seat belts with comfort
function (front seats) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . .1-21
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . .1-21
Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Installing top tether strap
(2nd row bench seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Installing top tether strap
(3rd row bench seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
SEATS
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to cause
a significant risk of injury or death to
people and pets.
ARS1152
WARNING
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against
your body. In an accident, you could be
thrown into it and receive neck or other
serious injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious internal
injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be
upright. Always sit well back and upright
in the seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. For additional
information, refer to “Precautions on
seat belt usage” in this section.
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
∙ Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could
become involved in serious accidents.
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of
the vehicle.
∙ The seatback should not be reclined any
more than needed for comfort. Seat belts
are most effective when the passenger
sits well back and straight up in the seat.
If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is
increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure
not to contact any moving parts to avoid
possible injuries and/or damage.
Reclining
Move the recline switch as shown until the
desired angle is obtained.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different sizes
for added comfort and to help obtain proper
seat belt fit. For additional information, refer
to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this
section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).
LRS2662
FRONT POWER SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Operating tips
∙ The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds
then reactivate the switch.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
Forward and backward
Moving the switch as shown will slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired position.
∙ Do not operate the power seat switch for
a long period of time when the engine is
off. This will discharge the battery.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
LRS2636
Driver’s seat
LRS2909
Passenger’s seat
Seat lifter
Move the switch as shown to adjust the
angle (if so equipped) and height of the seat
cushion.
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2270
Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver. Push
the switch as shown to adjust the seat lumbar area.
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever
2 and lean back. To bring the seatback for䊊
2 up and lean your body
ward, pull the lever 䊊
forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
LRS2143
Outboard seats
2ND ROW BENCH SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Forward and backward
1 up and hold it
Pull the center of the bar 䊊
while you slide the seat forward or backward
to the desired position. Release the bar to
lock the seat in position.
∙ For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be
upright. Always sit well back and upright
in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. For additional information, refer to
“Precautions on seat belt usage” in this
section.
The recline feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. For additional information, refer to
“Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).
WARNING
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against
your body. In an accident, you could be
thrown into it and receive neck or other
serious injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious internal
injuries.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Multi-mode
Slide the entire seat forward for access to the
3rd row.
WARNING
When returning the seat to its original position, confirm that the seat and seatback
are locked properly.
CAUTION
∙ Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot
or bump your head when operating the
walk-in seat.
LRS2142
One touch walk-in function
The 3rd row can be accessed from outside
the vehicle by using the seatback release lever located on the upper outboard side of the
seatback on the 2nd row bench seat. If a child
safety seat is installed on the passenger’s side
of the 2nd row seat, the 3rd row can be
accessed without removing the child safety
seat.
∙ Do not drive with the 2nd row seat tipped
up.
∙ Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat
to pinch, hit any part of your body or
other people when operating the 2nd row
seat. Make sure the seat path is clear of
all objects before moving the seat.
To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle, lift up on the seatback lever located on
the upper outboard side of the seatback on
the 2nd row bench seat. This will release the
back of the seat and fold up the seat cushion.
This will also release the seat tracks so you
will be able to slide the seat forward or backward.
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
To return the seat to a locked position, push
the upper seatback rearward until the seatback and tracks are locked. Push the seat
cushion down.
Child seat access mode
The passenger’s side of the 2nd row seat can
be slid forward for easy entry or exit from the
3rd row bench seat without a child safety
seat being removed.
To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle, lift up on the seatback lever located on
the upper outboard side of the seatback on
the 2nd row bench seat. This will release the
seatback. Then tilt the seat and release the
tracks so you will be able to slide the seat
forward or backward.
Slide the entire seat forward for access to the
rear seats.
To return the seat to a locked position, push
the upper seatback rearward until the seatback and track are locked.
WARNING
∙ Do not leave a child in the child safety
seat when operating the child seat access
mode.
∙ When returning the seat to its original
position, confirm that the seat and seatback are locked properly.
CAUTION
∙ Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot
or bump your head when operating the
walk-in seat.
∙ Do not drive with the 2nd row seat tipped
up.
∙ Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat
to pinch, hit any part of your body or
other people when operating the 2nd row
seat. Make sure the seat path is clear of
all objects before moving the seat.
Exiting the 3rd row
To exit the 3rd row from either seating position, lift the upper seatback release lever to
the uppermost position. This will release the
back of the seat, then fold the seat cushion
up and release the tracks.
Slide the entire seat forward.
To return the seat to a locked position, push
the upper seatback rearward until the seatback and track are locked.
WARNING
When returning the seat to its original position, confirm that the seat and seatback
are locked properly.
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot or
bump your head when operating the
walk-in seat.
LRS2147
3RD ROW BENCH SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull up on the latch
located on the outside corner of each seatback. Lean back until the desired angle is
obtained.
To bring the seatback forward again, pull up
on the latch and pull the seatback upright
until the desired angle is obtained.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
FLEXIBLE SEATING
The recline feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. For additional information, refer to
“Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).
WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seats when they are in
the fold-down position. In a collision,
people riding in these areas without
proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
WARNING
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against
your body. In an accident, you could be
thrown into it and receive neck or other
serious injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious internal
injuries.
LRS2924
ARMRESTS
The 2nd row bench seat comes equipped
with an armrest. Pull the armrest down as
shown.
∙ For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be
upright. Always sit well back and upright
in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. For additional information, refer to
“Precautions on seat belt usage” in this
section.
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat
belt properly.
∙ Do not fold down the rear seats when
occupants are in the rear seat area or any
luggage is on the rear seats.
∙ Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace and adjust them properly if
they have been removed for any reason.
∙ If the head restraints are removed for any
reason, they should be securely stored to
prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case
of sudden braking or an accident.
3. Lift up on the recline lever on the side of
the outboard seats to fold the seatbacks
flat.
∙ When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If
they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
seating position, push up on the seatback until it latches in place.
∙ Properly secure all cargo to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo
could cause personal injury.
LRS2144
Folding the 2nd row bench seat
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum cargo hauling:
1. Make sure that the head restraints are
lowered or removed. For maximum
cargo hauling, remove the head restraints. To remove the head restraints,
push and hold the lock knob while moving the head restraints in an upward direction. Store the head restraints properly so they are not loose in the vehicle.
2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat
belt hooks found on the sides of the
vehicle.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Manual operation to return the 3rd row seats
to a seating position (if so equipped):
C to raise each seat1. Use the pull straps 䊊
back. Pull back until the seatback latches
into position. Make sure to properly
raise each seatback to an upright and
secured position.
2. Do not use the pull strap to return the
head restraint to the upright position.
Pull back on the head restraint until it
latches in the upright position.
LRS2765
3rd row manual folding seats
To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum
cargo capacity:
1. Pull the strap 䊊 to release the head
restraint forward.
A
2. Stow the 3rd row seat belts in the seat
D found on the sides of the
belt hooks 䊊
cargo area.
B located in the
3. Pull up on the latch 䊊
upper corner of each seatback and lower
the seatback forward over the seat base.
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2623
Power operation to return the 3rd row seats
to a seating position (if so equipped):
E
1. Push and hold the corresponding switch 䊊
located on the right and left side in the
cargo area.
A beep sounds once and the seatback will be
returned automatically.
A beep sounds twice when the seatback is
fully returned to the seating position.
If the control unit detects any obstacle or
malfunctions while in the power operation, a
beep sounds for 4 seconds and the seatback
will return to the folded position automati-
HEAD RESTRAINTS
cally. Check if there are any obstacles caught
that prevent seats from returning to the
folded position. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer if the beep still
sounds.
CAUTION
When operating the 3rd row power seatback return, make sure that the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in the P
(Park) position.
WARNING
∙ When the seat is returned to the normal
seating position, the head restraints
must be returned to the upright position
to properly protect vehicle occupants.
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the 3rd row seats when they
are in the fold-down position. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat
belt properly.
∙ Do not fold down the 3rd row seats when
occupants are in the 3rd row seat area or
any luggage is on the 3rd row seats.
– Make sure that the seat path is clear
before moving the seat.
– Be careful not to allow hands or feet to
get caught or pinched in the seat.
∙ Properly secure all cargo to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo
could cause personal injury.
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain
rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints must be adjusted properly, as
specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do
not attach anything to the head restraint
stalks or remove the head restraint. Do not
use the seat if the head restraint has been
removed. If the head restraint was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the
head restraint before an occupant uses the
seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of
the head restraints. This may increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a collision.
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint that may be integrated, adjustable
or non-adjustable.
∙ Adjustable head restraints have multiple
notches along the stalk to lock them in a
desired adjustment position.
∙ The non-adjustable head restraints have
a single locking notch to secure them to
the seat frame.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
∙ Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the head
restraint so the center of your ear is
approximately level with the center of
the head restraint.
– If your ear position is still higher than
the recommended alignment, place
the head restraint at the highest position.
∙ If the head restraint has been removed,
ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in
place before riding in that designated
seating position.
LRS2300
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT
COMPONENTS
LRS2299
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint
1. Removable head restraint
2. Multiple notches
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
4. Stalks
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint before an occupant uses the
seating position.
LRS2302
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint:
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the
seat.
LRS2302
REMOVABLE (without Dual Head
Restraint DVD System only)
CAUTION
Do not remove head restraint from vehicles
equipped with Dual Head Restraint DVD
System. Removal may damage the system
wiring.
4. Store the head restraint properly in a
secure place so it is not loose in the
vehicle.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
LRS2303
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the
holes in the seat. Make sure that the
head restraint is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)
1 must be installed in the hole with the
䊊
2 .
lock knob 䊊
WRS0134
LRS2351
ADJUST
For non-adjustable head restraint
For adjustable head restraint
Make sure the head restraint is positioned
from the stored position or any non-latch
position so the lock knob is engaged in the
notch before riding in that designated seating
position.
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended
alignment, place the head restraint at the
highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before
an occupant uses the seating position.
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2305
LRS2306
LRS2307
Raise
Lower
FOLDING HEAD RESTRAINT
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint down.
To fold the head restraint, pull the strap located on the rear of the head restraint.
Make sure the head restraint is positioned so
the lock knob is engaged in the notch before
riding in that designated seating position.
If the head restraint has been folded, make
sure that it is returned to the upright position.
Make sure the head restraint is positioned
from the stored position or any non-latch
position so the lock knob is engaged in the
notch before riding in that designated seating
position.
Make sure the head restraint is positioned so
the lock knob(s) are engaged in the notch(es)
before riding in that designated seating position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
SEAT BELTS
WARNING
When the seat is returned to the normal
seating position, the head restraint must be
returned to the upright position to properly
protect vehicle occupants.
SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted and you are sitting upright and well
back in your seat with both feet on the floor,
your chances of being injured or killed in a
collision and/or the severity of injury may be
greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle
up every time you drive, even if your seating
position includes a supplemental air bag.
Some states, provinces or territories require
that seat belts be worn at all times when a
vehicle is being driven.
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0134
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.
Children should be in the rear seats and in
an appropriate restraint.
SSS0016
WARNING
∙ The seat belt should be properly adjusted
to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce
the effectiveness of the entire restraint
system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury
or death can occur if the seat belt is not
worn properly.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to use
the same seat belt.
∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
SSS0014
WARNING
∙ Always route the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never
put the belt behind your back, under your
arm or across your neck. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder.
∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in an
accident.
∙ If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON
with all doors closed and all seat belts
fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in
the system. Have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the
operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
∙ All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use
during a collision be replaced unless the
collision was minor and the belts show no
damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
∙ All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and
replacement recommendations. The child
restraints should be replaced if they are
damaged.
CHILD SAFETY
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
WARNING
LRS0786
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
The driver’s front seat is equipped with a seat
belt warning light.
The warning light, located on the instrument
panel, will show the status of the driver’s seat
belt.
For additional information, refer to “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible reminders”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
Do not allow children to play with the seat
belts. Most seating positions are equipped
with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes
wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR
mode activated, the child can be seriously
injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and
becomes tight. This can occur even if the
vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to
release the child. If the seat belt cannot be
unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release
the child by cutting the seat belt with a
suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to
release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available
from many other sources, including doctors,
teachers, government traffic safety offices,
and community organizations. Every child is
different, so be sure to learn the best way to
transport your child.
∙ Rear-facing child restraint
∙ Front-facing child restraint
∙ Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year old
and less than 9 kg (20 lbs.) should be placed in
rear-facing child restraints. Front-facing
child restraints are available for children who
outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are
at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to
help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a
child who can no longer use a front-facing
child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may come
too close to the face or neck. The lap belt
may not fit over their small hip bones. In an
accident, an improperly fitting seat belt
could cause serious or fatal injury. Always
use appropriate child restraints.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Some states, provinces or territories require
the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
Also, there are other types of child restraints
available for larger children for additional
protection.
All child restraints should be installed in the
rear seat. According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front seat. This is
especially important because your vehicle
may have a supplemental restraint system
(air bag system) for the front passenger. For
additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in this section.
Infants
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear facing child restraint.
INFINITI recommends that infants and small
children be placed in child restraints. You
should choose a child restraint that fits your
vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Small children
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
least 9 kg (20 lbs.) should remain in a rearfacing child restraint as long as possible up to
the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or
weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint
and are at least 1 year old should be secured
in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for minimum and maximum weight and
height recommendations. You should choose
a child restraint that fits your vehicle and
always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or
face and should not fall off the shoulder. The
lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips
or upper thighs, not the abdomen. Once the
child has grown so the shoulder belt is no
longer on or near the face and neck and the
lap belt can be positioned properly across the
lower hips or upper thighs, use the seat belt
without the booster seat.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat
and do not allow a child in the cargo area.
The child could be seriously injured or killed
in a sudden stop or collision.
Larger children
PREGNANT WOMEN
Children should remain in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness until they reach
the maximum height or weight limit allowed
by the child restraint manufacturer.
INFINITI recommends that pregnant women
use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn
snug and always position the lap belt as low
as possible around the hips, not the waist.
Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder
and across your chest. Never run the
lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area.
Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight
limit of the harness-equipped forward-facing
child restraint, INFINITI recommends that
the child be placed in a commercially available
booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For
a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat
should raise the child so that the shoulder belt
is properly positioned across the chest and
the top, middle portion of the shoulder.
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
INJURED PERSONS
INFINITI recommends that injured persons
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
specific recommendations.
PRE-CRASH SEAT BELTS WITH
COMFORT FUNCTION
(front seats) (if so equipped)
The pre-crash seat belt tightens the seat belt
with a motor to help restrain front seat occupants. This helps reduce the risk of injury in a
collision.
The motor retracts the seat belt under the
following emergency conditions:
∙ During emergency braking.
∙ During sudden steering maneuvers.
∙ Activation of the Forward Emergency
Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection
system (if so equipped). For additional
information, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
∙ In the event of certain types of rollover
collisions.
The pre-crash seat belt will not be active
when:
∙ the seat belt is not fastened.
∙ the vehicle speed is under 15 km/h
(10 mph) during emergency braking.
∙ the vehicle speed is under 30 km/h
(19 mph) during sudden steering maneuvers.
The pre-crash seat belt will not be active
when the brake pedal is not depressed except
when sudden steering maneuvers occur and
the Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system (if so equipped)
activates.
The motor also retracts the seat belt when
the seat belt is fastened or unfastened. When
the seat belt is fastened, the motor tightens
the seat belt for a snug fit. When the seat belt
is unfastened, the motor retracts the seat
belt. If the seat belt is not fully retracted, the
motor retracts the seat belt when the door is
opened.
Always wear your seat belt correctly and sit
upright and well back.
If the motor cannot retract the seat belt when
the seat belt is fastened or unfastened, it may
indicate the pre-crash seat belt system has a
malfunction. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer to check and repair the
system.
When the seat belt is retracted repeatedly in
a short period of time, the motor may not be
able to retract the seat belt. After 8 minutes,
the motor reactivates and retracts the seat
belt. If the seat belt still cannot be retracted
by the motor, the pre-crash seat belt system
has a malfunction. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer to check and
repair the system.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.
Children should be in the rear seats and in
an appropriate restraint.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against
your body. In an accident, you could be
thrown into it and receive neck or other
serious injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious internal
injuries.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
∙ For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be
upright. Always sit well back and upright
in the seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.
∙ Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes tight.
This can occur even if the vehicle is
parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release
the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release
the child by cutting the seat belt with a
suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors)
to release the seat belt.
LRS2662
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section.
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
gers some freedom of movement in the seat.
The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle
slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the seat
belt tongue is detached from the buckle and
fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the
ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts.
For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
LRS2674
LRS2675
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
A until you hear and feel the
buckle 䊊
latch engage.
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
B as shown.
snug on the hips 䊊
∙ The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow
pulling motion permits the seat belt to
move and allows you some freedom of
movement in the seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
C . Be
retractor to take up extra slack 䊊
sure the shoulder belt is routed over your
shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two
modes of operation:
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend
and retract to allow the driver and passen-
The ALR mode should be used only for child
restraint installation. During normal seat
belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.
It can also change the operation of the front
passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and
status light” in this section.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely secured
in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured
in an accident or sudden stop.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows.
∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for
this service, or to learn more about seat belt
operation.
WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
SSS0896
䊊
A
Shoulder belt height adjust button
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
1 . The seat belt automatically
the buckle 䊊
retracts.
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front and 2nd row outboard seats)
Checking seat belt operation
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. For
additional information, refer to “Precautions
on seat belt usage” in this section.
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat
belt movement by two separate methods:
∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor.
∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
To adjust, push the button and then move the
shoulder belt anchor to the desired position
so that the belt passes over the center of the
shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off of your
shoulder. Release the adjustment button to
lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.
Seat belt extenders are available for the:
∙ Driver and front passenger seating position
WARNING
∙ 2nd and 3rd row seating position
∙ After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure
it is securely fixed in position.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.
∙ The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and
increase the chance or severity of injury
in an accident.
∙ Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should be
used with INFINITI seat belts.
∙ The shoulder belt should rest on the
middle of the shoulder. It must not rest
against the neck.
∙ Be sure that the seat belt is not twisted in
any way.
∙ Be sure that the shoulder belt anchor is
secured by trying to move the shoulder
belt anchor up and down after
adjustment.
WARNING
LRS2157
3rd row shown; 2nd row similar
Seat belt hook
When the seat belt is not in use and when
folding down the rear seats, hook the rear
seat belts on the seat belt hooks.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder
belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available
for purchase. The extender adds approximately 200 mm (8 in) of length and may be
used for either the driver or front passenger
seating position.
∙ Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender.
Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an
accident.
∙ Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured or killed in a collision or a
sudden stop.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
CHILD RESTRAINTS
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the
seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
allow the seat belts to retract until they
are completely dry.
∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide
of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts
may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
∙ Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors, work properly. If loose
parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire
seat belt assembly should be replaced.
ARS1098
WRS0256
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation
of child restraints could result in serious
injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all of
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a
collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
– INFINITI recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear
seat than in the front seat. If you must
install a forward-facing child restraint
in the front seat, refer to “Forwardfacing child restraint installation using the seat belts” in this section.
– Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating
air bag could seriously injure or kill a
child. A rear-facing child restraint
must only be used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle. Some
child restraints may not fit properly in
your vehicle.
– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts,
harnesses or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so
could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not
be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be
seriously injured or killed in a collision.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible
after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always be
placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.
∙ When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants
or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface
and buckles before placing a child in the
child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments
that can be connected to these anchors. For
additional information, refer to “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints
for infants and children of various sizes.
When selecting any child restraint, keep the
following points in mind:
∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s
seat and seat belt system.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
∙ If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the child
restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is
compatible with your child. Choose a
child restraint that is designed for your
child’s height and weight. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
The LATCH lower anchor points are provided
to install child restraints in the following positions only:
∙ 2nd row bench seat – outboard seating
positions
LATCH lower anchor
Some states, provinces or territories require
that infants and small children be restrained
in an approved child restraint at all times
while the vehicle is being opera=ted.
WARNING
LRS2922
LATCH system lower anchor locations bench seat
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH system
compatible child restraints. This system may
also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX
compatible system. With this system, you do
not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure
the child restraint.
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child
restraints could result in serious injury or
death of a child or other passengers in a
sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using the
LATCH system anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.
– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting
your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such as
seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be
secured properly if the lower anchors
are obstructed.
– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts,
harnesses or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so
could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not
be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be
seriously injured or killed in a collision.
WRS0700
LATCH lower anchor location
LRS2930
LATCH label locations 2nd row bench
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
shown. A label is attached to the seatback to
help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Top tether anchor
WARNING
∙ Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor. Properly secure the
cargo so it does not contact the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not properly
secured or cargo that contacts the top
tether strap may damage it during a collision. A child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the top tether strap
is damaged.
LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH
lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments
that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to
use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child
restraint. Check your child restraint for a label
stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This
information may also be in the instructions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer.
LRS0662
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child restraint.
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint
will not be properly installed using the
damaged anchorage, and a child could be
seriously injured or killed in a collision.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
REAR-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
LRS2553
LRS2508
2nd row bench seat
䊊
2
䊊
1
Top tether strap
Anchor point
3rd row bench seat
䊊
2
䊊
1
Top tether strap
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint in the 2nd row outboard seats
using the LATCH system:
WARNING
Anchor point
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located in the following
locations:
∙ 2nd row bench on the bottom of the
seatback in the seating positions shown.
∙ 3rd row bench on the bottom of the seatback on the passenger side seating position as shown.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so
could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WRS0801
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower
anchors.
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0802
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
You may need to try a different child
restraint or try installing by using the
vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING THE SEAT BELTS
LRS0673
Rear-facing – step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and
rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your hand to compress the
vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
tightening the webbing of the anchor
attachments.
LRS0674
Rear-facing – step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not move
more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to
side. Try to tug it forward and check to
see if the LATCH attachment holds the
restraint in place. If the restraint is not
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be used
in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.
Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the buckle
until you hear and feel the latch engage.
Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for belt
routing.
LRS0669
Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint
mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when
the seat belt is fully retracted.
LRS0670
Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in
the belt.
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward
firmly in the center of the child restraint
to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 1 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child
restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING LATCH
WRS0763
Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint in the 2nd row outboard
seats using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0799
Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower
anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to the
tether anchor point. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether
strap (2nd row bench seat)” in this section.
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint when the
child restraint is removed. For additional
information about head restraint adjustment, refer to “Head restraints” in this
section.
WRS0800
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
Do not install child restraints that require
the use of a top tether strap in seating
positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different child restraint.
LRS0671
Forward-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and
rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress the
vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
tightening the webbing of the anchor
attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove
any slack.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 6.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
WRS0697
Forward-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not move
more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to
side. Try to tug it forward and check to
see if the LATCH attachment holds the
restraint in place. If the restraint is not
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation
of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger
seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in the
front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in the
rear-facing direction and, therefore,
must not be used in the front seat.
Do not install child restraints that require
the use of a top tether strap in seating
positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint when the
child restraint is removed. For additional
information about head restraint adjustment, removal and installation, refer to
“Head restraints” in this section.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different child restraint.
WRS0680
Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the buckle
until you hear and feel the latch engage.
Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for belt
routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to the
tether anchor point (rear seat installation
only). For additional information, refer to
“Installing top tether strap (2nd row
bench seat)” in this section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint
mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the
seat belt is fully retracted.
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in
the belt.
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward
firmly in the center of the child restraint
with your knee to compress the vehicle
seat cushion and seatback while pulling
up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove
any slack.
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
LRS0865
Forward-facing – step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front passhould
senger air bag status light
illuminate. If this light is not illuminated,
refer to “Front passenger air bag and
status light” in this section. Move the
child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. If necessary, raise or remove the head
restraint to position the top tether strap
over the top of the seatback. If the head
restraint is removed, store it in a secure
place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. For additional information
about head restraint adjustment, removal and installation, refer to “Head
restraints” in this section.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point as shown.
LRS2553
2nd row bench seat
1
䊊
2
䊊
Top tether strap
Anchor point
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
(2nd row bench seat)
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (2nd row bench outboard seating positions only) or the seat belt,
as applicable.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove
any slack. Make sure the head restraint
does not contact the top tether strap.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point as shown.
2. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove
any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2508
3rd row bench seat
1
䊊
2
䊊
Top tether strap
Anchor point
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
(3rd row bench seat)
WARNING
In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint
with a top tether strap can only be used on
the passenger side seating position. Do not
place in the driver’s side seating position
and attempt to angle the tether strap to
the passenger side seating position.
The passenger side of the 3rd row bench seat
is the seating position that can use a top
tether strap.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt, as applicable.
1. Position the top tether strap as shown.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove
any slack. Make sure the head restraint
does not contact the top tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
∙ Infants and small children should always
be placed in an appropriate child restraint
while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a
child restraint or booster seat can result
in serious injury or death.
∙ A booster seat must only be installed in a
seating position that has a lap/shoulder
belt. Failure to use a three-point type
seat belt with a booster seat can result in
a serious injury in sudden stop or collision.
∙ Improper use or improper installation of a
booster seat can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and
other occupants of the vehicle and can
lead to serious injury or death in an
accident.
∙ Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
for even the strongest adult to resist the
forces of a severe accident. The child
could be crushed between the adult and
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
same seat belt around both your child and
yourself.
∙ INFINITI recommends that the booster
seat be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seat than in the front seat. If you must
install a booster seat in the front seat,
refer to “Booster seat installation” in this
section
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
LRS0501
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0464
LRS2479
A.
Low back booster seat
B.
High back booster seat
WARNING
∙ Do not use towels, books, pillows or
other items in place of a booster seat.
Items such as these may move during
normal driving or a collision and result in
serious injury or death. Booster seats are
designed to be used with a lap/shoulder
belt. Booster seats are designed to properly route the lap and shoulder portions
of the seat belt over the strongest portions of a child’s body to provide the
maximum protection during a collision.
∙ If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the
booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is
compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures.
Some states, provinces or territories require
that infants and small children be restrained
in an approved child restraint at all times
while the vehicle is being operated.
WARNING
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in
mind:
∙ Improper use of a booster seat can increase the risk or severity of injury for
both the child and other occupants of the
vehicle.
∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s
seat and seat belt system.
∙ Follow all of the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use. When purchasing a booster seat, be
sure to select one which will fit your child
and vehicle. It may not be possible to
properly install some types of booster
seats in your vehicle.
∙ Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or
above the center of the child’s ears. For
example, if a low back booster seat is
chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at
or above the center of the child’s ears. If
the seatback is lower than the center of
the child’s ears, a high back booster seat
should be used.
∙ If the booster seat and seat belt is not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured or killed in a collision or a sudden
stop greatly increases.
∙ Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the booster seat, but as upright as possible.
∙ After placing the child in the booster seat
and fastening the seat belt, make sure
the shoulder portion of the belt is away
from the child’s face and neck and the lap
portion of the belt does not cross the
abdomen.
∙ Do not put the shoulder belt behind the
child or under the child’s arm. If you must
install a booster seat in the front seat,
refer to “Booster seat installation” in this
section.
∙ When your booster seat is not in use,
keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case
of a sudden stop or accident.
CAUTION
Remember that a booster seat left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot. Check
the seating surface and buckles before
placing your child in the booster seat.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode when using a
booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety”, “Child
restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of
this manual before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in
the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
WRS0699
LRS0454
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct booster
seat fit. If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the
booster seat is removed. For additional
information about head restraint adjustment, removal and installation, refer to
“Head restraints” in this section.
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different booster seat.
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
∙ Driver and front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag (INFINITI Advanced
Air Bag System)
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure
to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat
belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat
belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the top, middle portion
of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow
the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat belt
with retractor” in this section.
∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag
∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front seats)
LRS0865
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch
in the ON position. The front passenger
may or may not
air bag status light
illuminate, depending on the size of the
child and the type of booster seat being
used. For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head and
chest of the driver and front passenger in
certain frontal collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and front
passenger in certain side-impact collisions.
The side air bags are designed to inflate on
the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in front and
rear outboard seating positions in certain
side-impact or rollover collisions. In a side
impact, the curtain air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are
designed to inflate and remain inflated for a
short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash
protection provided by the driver and front
passenger seat belts and is not a substitute
for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel,
instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in
this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WRS0031
WARNING
∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal
collision. Always wear your seat belts to
help reduce the risk or severity of injury in
various kinds of accidents.
∙ The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light
is lit. For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front air
bags inflate with great force. Even with
the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System, if
you are unrestrained, leaning forward,
sitting sideways or out of position in any
way, you are at greater risk of injury or
death in a crash. You may also receive
serious or fatal injuries from the front air
bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System
monitors the severity of a collision and
seat belt usage then inflates the air bags
as needed. Failure to properly wear seat
belts can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
∙ The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat.
Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this
section.
ARS1133
∙ Keep hands on the outside of the steering
wheel. Placing them inside the steering
wheel rim could increase the risk that
they are injured when the front air bag
inflates.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
ARS1041
WARNING
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your
lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous
riding positions are shown in the
illustrations.
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ARS1042
ARS1043
ARS1044
ARS1045
ARS1046
WARNING
∙ Children may be severely injured or killed
when the front air bags, side air bags or
curtain air bags inflate if they are not
properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the
rear seat, if possible.
∙ Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or
kill your child. For additional information,
refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
WRS0431
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact and rollover supplemental air
bags:
∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a
frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0365
SSS0162
WARNING
∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you
are sitting well back and upright in the
seat with both feet on the floor. The side
air bag and curtain air bag inflate with
great force. Do not allow anyone to place
their hand, leg or face near the side air
bag on the side of the seatback of the
front seat or near the side roof rails. Do
not allow anyone sitting in the front
seats or rear outboard seats to extend
their hand out of the window or lean
against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the
previous illustrations.
WRS0363
SSS0159
WARNING
∙ When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do
not hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may
be seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown in
the illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air
bag inflation.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag inflators
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
4. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
5. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
6. Crash zone sensor
7. Occupant classification system
control unit
8. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor – located on
passenger seat frame)
9. Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front seats)
10. Satellite sensors
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
LRS2534
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System,
please observe the following items.
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat
to push or pull on the seatback pocket.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint or in the seatback pocket.
∙ Make sure that there is nothing pressing
against the rear of the seatback, such as a
child restraint installed in the rear seat or
an object stored on the floor.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
between the seat cushion and the center
console or between the seat cushion and
the door.
∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do not
position the front passenger seat so the
child restraint contacts the instrument
panel. If the child restraint does contact
the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision.
Also the front passenger air bag status
light may not illuminate. For additional
information about installing and using
child restraints, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
∙ Confirm the operating condition with the
front passenger air bag status light.
∙ If you notice that the front passenger air
bag status light is not operating as described in this section, get the occupant
classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ Until you have confirmed with a retailer
that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating
positions.
∙ Do not position the front passenger seat
so it contacts the rear seat. If the front
seat does contact the rear seat, the air
bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate
and the supplemental air bag warning
light may flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada. All of the information, cautions and
warnings in this manual still apply and must
be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag
is located in the center of the steering wheel.
The front passenger supplemental frontimpact air bag is mounted in the dashboard
above the glove box. The front air bags are
designed to inflate in higher severity frontal
collisions, although they may inflate if the
forces in another type of collision are similar
to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not
always an indication of proper front air bag
system operation.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat
belt buckle sensor and occupant classification sensor (weight sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and
seat belt usage for the driver. For the front
passenger, the occupant classification sensor
is also monitored. Based on information from
the sensor, only one front air bag may inflate
in a crash, depending on the crash severity
and whether the front occupants are belted
or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger
air bag may be automatically turned off under some conditions, depending on the
weight detected on the passenger seat and
how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the front passenger air
bag status light will be illuminated. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section. One
front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, it is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer to obtain information about
the system. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you
may also contact INFINITI. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s
Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the release
of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does
not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to
not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing
condition should get fresh air promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on the
face and chest of the front occupants. They
can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.
However, an inflating front air bag may cause
facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air
bags do not provide restraint to the lower
body.
Even with INFINITI Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the driver
and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly
in order to help protect the front occupants.
Because of this, the force of the front air bag
inflating can increase the risk of injury if the
occupant is too close to, or is against, the
front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn
how it operates. Proper use of the seat,
seat belt and child restraints is necessary
for most effective protection. Failure to
follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child
restraints can increase the risk or severity
of injury in an accident.
LRS0865
Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with an
occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag on
or off depending on the weight applied to the
front passenger seat. The status of the front
passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by
the front passenger air bag status light
which is located on the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the "ON"
position, the front passenger air bag status
light on the instrument panel illuminates for
about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front
passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
CONDITION
DESCRIPTION
PASSENGER AIR BAG
)
INDICATOR LIGHT (
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS
Empty
Empty front passenger seat
ON (illuminated)
INHIBITED
Nobody/Somebody
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Small Adult in front passenger seat
ON (illuminated)
INHIBITED
Adult
Adult in the front passenger seat
OFF (dark)
ACTIVATED
In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may also
cause the light to operate as described above
depending on their weight.
For additional information, refer to “Normal
operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described
below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If
the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not
inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other
air bags in your vehicle are not part of this
system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat
occupants, such as children, by requiring the
air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.
outlined in this manual should not cause the
front passenger air bag to be automatically
turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned
OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her
weight off the seat cushion (for example, by
not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of
the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the
air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and
wearing the seat belt properly for the most
effective protection by the seat belt and
supplemental air bag.
The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the seat
by weight. For example, if a child is in the
front passenger seat, the INFINITI Advanced
Air Bag System is designed to turn the front
passenger air bag OFF in accordance with
the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the
type specified in the regulations is on the
seat, its weight and the child’s weight can be
detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear seat.
INFINITI also recommends that appropriate
child restraints and booster seats be properly
installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible,
the occupant classification sensor is designed
to operate as described above to turn the
front passenger air bag OFF for specified
child restraints as required by the regulations.
Failing to properly secure child restraints and
to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint
to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop.
This can also result in the passenger air bag
inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For
additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt as
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not to
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor.
Other conditions could also result in air bag
inflation, such as if a child is standing on the
seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status light,
you can monitor when the front passenger air
bag is automatically turned OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it
could be that the person is a small adult, or is
not sitting on the seat properly or not using
the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status light
may or may not be illuminated, depending on
the size of the child and the type of child
restraint being used. If the air bag status light
is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag
might inflate in a crash), it could be that the
child restraint or seat belt is not being used
properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used prop-
erly and the occupant is positioned properly.
If the air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light will
not illuminate even though you believe that
the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an
INFINITI retailer. An INFINITI retailer can
check system status by using a special tool.
However, until you have confirmed with a
retailer that your air bag is working properly,
reposition the occupant or child restraint in a
rear seat.
The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will take a
few seconds to register a change in the front
passenger seat status. This is normal system
operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger
air bag system, the supplemental air bag
, located in the meter and
warning light
gauges area of the instrument panel, will be
illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have the
system checked. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Normal operation
Steps
In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passenger
based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
∙ Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear of
the seatback.
∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the front
passenger seat.
∙ Make sure that the front passenger seat
or seatback is not forced back against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your
lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
“Seat belts” section of this manual. Front
passenger seat belt buckle status is
monitored by the occupant classification
system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So, it is highly
recommended that the front passenger
fasten their seat belt.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the front
passenger before the vehicle is put into
motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking
the front passenger air bag status light.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification sensor
system generally keeps the classification
locked during driving, so it is important that
you confirm that the front passenger is
properly classified prior to driving. However,
the occupant classification sensor may recalculate the weight of the occupant under
some conditions (both while driving and
when stopped), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as
outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag status
light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying
the front passenger seat:
∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag
light is functioning as intended. The front
passenger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small adult,
then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight
sensors:
∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for
this service.
2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child
or child restraint occupying the front
passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the
seat cushion and the door.
∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the floor.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct
any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
∙ The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of this manual.
1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct
any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small
adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat the vehicle should be checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel pad or on the instrument panel.
Also, do not place any objects between
any occupant and the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.
∙ Immediately after inflation, several front
air bag system components will be hot.
Do not touch them; you may severely
burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be made
to any components or wiring of the
supplemental air bag system. This is to
prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This
could affect proper operation of the
front air bag system.
∙ Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the
steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional
trim material around the air bag system.
∙ Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of the air
bag system and result in serious personal
injury.
∙ Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal
injury. For example, do not change the
front seats by placing material on the seat
cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that
are not specifically designed to assure
proper air bag operation. Additionally, do
not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the
proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight sensor).
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
similar to those of a higher severity impact.
They are designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted. They may not
inflate in certain side collisions.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be made
to any components or wiring of the seat
belt system. This may affect the front air
bag system. Tampering with the seat belt
system may result in serious personal
injury.
∙ It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for installation of electrical equipment. The
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
wiring harnesses* should not be modified
or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the air bag system.
∙ A cracked windshield should be replaced
immediately by a qualified repair facility.
A cracked windshield could affect the
function of the supplemental air bag
system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air bag
system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in
certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to
inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain
air bag operation.
WRS0381
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and
roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of
the seatback of the front seats. The curtain
air bags are located in the side roof rails in all
three rows. All of the information, cautions
and warnings in this manual apply and must
be followed. The side air bags and curtain air
bags are designed to inflate in higher severity
side collisions, although they may inflate if
the forces in another type of collision are
1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not
harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care
should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get
fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest
of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help
to cushion the impact force to the head of
occupants in the front and rear outboard
seating positions in all rows. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag or curtain air
bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.
Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and
the driver and front passenger seated upright
as far as practical away from the side air bag.
Rear seat passengers should be seated as far
away as practical from the door finishers and
side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain
air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the occupants. Because of this, the force of
the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating
can increase the risk of injury if the occupant
is too close to, or is against, these air bag
modules during inflation. The side air bag will
deflate quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a
short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place
any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the
front seat. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause injury if
a side air bag inflates.
∙ Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be made
to any components or wiring of the side
air bag and curtain air bag systems. This
is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air
bag systems.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the curtain air
bag systems.
∙ Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury. For
example, do not change the front seats
by placing material near the seatbacks or
by installing additional trim material,
such as seat covers, around the side air
bag.
∙ It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is
also recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the side air bag or curtain
air bag systems.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are
yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air bags
and curtain air bag system and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63
Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front seats)
WARNING
∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a
unit.
∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner
system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be made
to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the
pretensioner system may result in serious
personal injury.
∙ It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for work on and around
the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
∙ If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. Incorrect disposal
procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with
the supplemental air bag system in certain
types of collisions. Working with the seat belt
retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the
seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved
in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the
seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor
affixed to the floor of the vehicle. These seat
belts are used the same way as conventional
seat belts.
1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with
a history of a breathing condition should get
fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if
necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light
is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system. For additional information, refer to "Supplemental air bag warning light" in
this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is
a malfunction, have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the pretensioner
system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and
pretensioner systems need servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
LRS2158
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels
The warning labels are located on the
surface of the sun visor.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in the
vehicle as shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected by
an air bag in front of it!
LRS0100
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the air bag systems,
pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side
air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be
checked and repaired. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is
on, it could mean that the front air bag, side
air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner
systems will not operate in an accident. To
help avoid injury to yourself or others, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It
is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65
Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,
unless it is damaged, the supplemental air
bag warning light remains illuminated after
inflation has occurred. These systems should
be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and related
parts should be pointed out to the person
performing the maintenance. The ignition
switch should always be placed in the LOCK
position when working under the hood or
inside the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be
replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The
air bag module and pretensioner(s)
should be replaced. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service. However, the air bag module and
pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
∙ The front air bag, side air bag and curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any
damage to the front end or side portion
of the vehicle. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ If you need to dispose of a supplemental
air bag or pretensioner system or scrap
the vehicle, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal
injury.
1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle from
any direction, your occupant classification sensor should be checked to verify it
is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. The occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) should
be checked even if no air bags deploy as a
result of the impact. Failure to verify
proper occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) function may result in an
improper air bag deployment resulting in
injury or death.
MEMO
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Fuel gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
How to use the vehicle information
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Resetting the trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Rain-sensing auto wiper system
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Rear switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Rear window and outside mirror defogger
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Xenon headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Climate controlled seat switches
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Heated 2nd row seat switches (if so equipped) . . 2-47
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . . 2-48
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . 2-49
Rear Door Alert (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Warning systems switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . .2-51
Power inverter switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12v outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120v outlet (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo area storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof rack (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-51
2-52
2-52
2-53
2-54
2-55
2-56
2-56
2-56
2-57
2-57
2-58
2-58
2-59
2-61
2-61
2-62
2-63
2-63
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Power moonroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Dual panel moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Power moonroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Personal Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Cargo light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Operating the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Programming trouble-diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Clearing the programmed information. . . . . . . . 2-76
Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
LII2421
2-2 Instruments and controls
Vent (P. 4-32)
Headlight/fog light/turn signal
switch (P. 2-39)
3.
Instrument brightness control
(P. 2-39)
4.
Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)
Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-8)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-16)
5.
Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-47)
Horn (P. 2-45)
6.
Back-up Collision Intervention
(BCI) system switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-60)
7.
Twin trip odometer reset switch
(P. 2-5)
8.
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-35)
Rear wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-35)
9.
Vent (P. 4-32)
10. Rear window defogger switch
(P. 2-38)
11. Center display/Navigation system*
12. Automatic heater and air
conditioning controls (P. 4-33)
13. Vent (P. 4-32)
14. Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-47)
15. Vent (P. 4-32)
16. Glove box (P. 2-56)
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Center multi-function control
buttons*
Power outlet (P. 2-52)
Audio system controls*
Shift lever (P. 5-18)
Front passenger air bag status light
(P.1-47)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
Ignition switch (P. 5-13)
Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-76)
Intelligent Cruise Control main/set
switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-78)
Dynamic Driver Assistance switch (if
so equipped) (P. 5-32, 5-48, 5-99)
Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-31)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System*
Steering wheel switch for audio
control*
Hood release (P. 3-22)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
OFF switch (P. 2-49)
Power inverter switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)
Liftgate release switch (P. 3-23)
31.
Power liftgate main switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)
Warning Systems switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)
Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-16)
*: Refer to the separate Infiniti InTouchTM
Owner’s Manual.
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
Instruments and controls 2-3
METERS AND GAUGES
SPEEDOMETER AND
ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer
and odometer. The speedometer is located
on the right side of the meter cluster. The
odometer is located below the vehicle information display.
LIC2254
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights
Vehicle information display
Speedometer
2-4 Instruments and controls
5.
6.
7.
Fuel gauge
Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Changing the display
3 switch on the right
Push the TRIP RESET 䊊
side of the instrument panel to change the
display as follows:
Trip
→ Trip
→ Trip
Resetting the trip odometer
3 for more
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
than 1 second resets the currently displayed
trip odometer to zero.
LIC2255
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
LIC2234
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
Average fuel economy and distance to empty
information is also available. For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in this section.
1 and the twin trip odometer 䊊
2
The odometer 䊊
are displayed below the vehicle information
display when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance
of individual trips.
Instruments and controls 2-5
LIC2795
LIC2219
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev en1 .
gine into the red zone 䊊
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the
engine in the red zone may cause serious
engine damage.
2-6 Instruments and controls
Type A (if so equipped)
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is
1 when the gauge
within the normal range 䊊
needle points within the zone shown in the
illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with
the outside air temperature and driving conditions.
LIC2220
Type B (if so equipped)
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature
near the hot (H) end of the normal range,
reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range,
stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If
the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage
the engine. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this manual
for immediate action required.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).
indicates that the fuel-filler door
The
is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
LIC2222
∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After
light should
a few driving trips. the
turn off. If the light remains on after a
few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down
hills.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The low fuel warning light comes on when
the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Instruments and controls 2-7
WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light
Seat belt warning light and chime
High beam indicator light (blue)
Brake warning light
Speed [120 km/h (75 mph)] warning light
(if so equipped)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Charge warning light
Supplemental air bag warning light
Security indicator light
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light
(if so equipped)
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) position indicator light
Side light and headlight indicator light
(green)
Low tire pressure warning light
(if so equipped)
Front fog light indicator light
Slip indicator light
Master warning light
Front passenger air bag status light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Power steering warning light
CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine.
2-8 Instruments and controls
High beam assist indicator light (green)
(if so equipped)
The following lights (if so equipped) will come
on:
,
,
,
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
OFF indicator light
The following lights (if so equipped) will come
on briefly and then go off:
,
,
,
,
If any light fails to come on or operate in a
way other than described, it may indicate a
burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for
this service.
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed in the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachometer. For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. For additional information, refer to
“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Brake warning light
This light functions for both the parking brake
and the foot brake systems.
WARNING LIGHTS
Parking brake indicator
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and
then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine is
running with the parking brake not applied,
stop the vehicle and perform the following:
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may
indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, it is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer.
WARNING
∙ Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driving
could be dangerous. If you judge it to be
safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have
your vehicle towed because driving it
could be dangerous.
∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the engine
stopped and/or a low brake fluid level
may increase your stopping distance and
braking will require greater pedal effort
as well as pedal travel.
∙ If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid
reservoir, do not drive until the brake
system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-9
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminate, it may
indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.
Have the brake system checked, and if necessary, repaired. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Avoid high-speed driving and abrupt braking.
For additional information, refer to “Anti-lock
Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this
section.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is
not functioning properly. Turn the engine off
and check the generator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains
on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for
this service.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
2-10 Instruments and controls
Forward Emergency
Braking (FEB) with
Pedestrian Detection
system warning light
(if so equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position. It turns off after
the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF in the
vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the FEB with
Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may
indicate that the system is unavailable. For
additional information, refer to “Forward
Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Low tire pressure warning
light (if so equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the
tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of
low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS
is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A
“Tyre Pressure Low - Add Air” warning also
appears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the
tire placard located in the driver’s door
opening. The low tire pressure warning light
does not automatically turn off when the
tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above
25 km/h (16 mph) to activate the TPMS and
turn off the low tire pressure warning light.
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure.
The “Tyre Pressure Low - Add Air” warning
appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section and “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” and “In case of emergency” sections of this manual.
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The light
will remain on after the 1 minute. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. The
“Tyre Pressure Low - Add Air” warning does
not appear if the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
∙ If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch placed in the ON position,
have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible for this service.
∙ If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
off the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving
with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the
likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle
damage could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the tire placard label
located in the driver’s door opening to
turn the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If the light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pressure,
a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be
malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are
properly inflated, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of
less than 25 km/h (16 mph), the TPMS
may not operate correctly.
Instruments and controls 2-11
∙ Be sure to install the specified size of tires
to the four wheels correctly.
Master warning light
This light comes on when various vehicle information display warnings appear.
∙ No key warning
∙ Low fuel warning
∙ Low windshield-washer fluid warning
∙ Parking brake release warning
∙ Door open warning
∙ Loose fuel cap warning
∙ Check tire pressure warning
(if so equipped)
Power steering
warning light
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be
harder to operate.
2-12 Instruments and controls
∙ When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of the
vehicle but the steering will be harder to
operate. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light
illuminates. After starting the engine, the
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates that the electric power steering system is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the hydraulic pump electric power
steering system checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be
no power assist for the steering but you will
still have control of the vehicle. At this time,
greater steering effort is required to operate
the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns
and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power
steering” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Seat belt warning light
and chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position
and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat
belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.
For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of the
manual.
Speed [120 km/h (75 mph)]
warning light
(if so equipped)
This light blinks when the vehicle speed goes
over approximately 120 km/h (75 mph). Be
sure to observe the speed limit in the area
where you are driving.
Supplemental air bag
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds
and then turns off. This means the system is
operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and
pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or
the pretensioners may not function properly.
For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in the
“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is
on, it could mean that the front air bag, side
air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner
systems will not operate in an accident. To
help avoid injury to yourself or others, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It
is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) position
indicator light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this indicator light shows the shift
lever position. For additional information, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Front fog light
indicator light
The front fog light indicator light illuminates
when the front fog lights are on. For additional information, refer to “Front and/or rear
fog light switch” in this section.
Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status light will
be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
off depending on how the front passenger
seat is being used.
For additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
High beam assist indicator
light (green) (if so equipped)
This indicator light illuminates when the
headlights come on while the headlight
switch is in the AUTO position with the high
beams selected. This indicates that the high
beam assist is operational.
For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight
high beams are on and goes out when the
low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.
Instruments and controls 2-13
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.
The MIL may also come on steady if the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least
11.4 liters (3 gallons) of fuel in the fuel tank.
light
After a few driving trips, the
should turn off if no other potential emission
control system malfunction exists.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected.
Check the fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler
cap is loose or missing, tighten or install
the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
light should turn off after a
The
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips, have
the vehicle checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service. You do not need to have your
vehicle towed to the retailer.
2-14 Instruments and controls
∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been
detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid
emission control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above 72 km/h
(45 mph).
– avoid hard acceleration or
deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The check engine light may stop blinking and
come on steady. Have the vehicle checked. It
is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service. You do not need to
have your vehicle towed to the retailer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission control system.
Security indicator light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.
The blinking security indicator light indicates
that the security systems equipped on the
vehicle are operational.
For additional information, refer to “Security
systems” in this section.
Side light and headlight
indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light
illuminates when the side light or headlights
are on (not including daytime running or signature lights). If the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the side light and headlight
indicator light will illuminate when the headlights turn on. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in
this section.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system
is operating, thus alerting the driver to the
fact that the road surface is slippery and the
vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
You may feel or hear the system working; this
is normal.
The light will blink for a few seconds after the
VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.
indicator light also comes on when
The
you place the ignition switch in the ON position. The light will turn off after approximately 2 seconds if the system is operational.
If the light does not come on have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn
signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
turned on.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the VDC
OFF switch is pushed to off. This indicates
the VDC has been turned off.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine and the system will be reactivated.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
The VDC light also comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The
light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the
system is operational. If the light stays on or
indicator light
comes on along with the
while you are driving, have the VDC system
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC
or OFF position or placed in the OFF or
LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in
the vehicle. Make sure the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK position, and take the
Intelligent Key with you when leaving the
vehicle.
VDC should remain on unless freeing a vehicle from mud or snow.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
and Lane Departure Prevention
(LDP) warning chime
(if so equipped)
While the VDC system is operating, you
might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.
When the LDW or LDP system is on, the
chime sounds if the vehicle is traveling close
to either the left or the right of a traveling
lane with detectable lane markers.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
For additional information, refer to “Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) system” or “Lane
Departure Prevention (LDP) system” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
WARNING
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound
when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not
the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the warning
sound is heard.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.
Instruments and controls 2-15
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
Turn the headlight control switch off before
leaving the vehicle.
∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
(if so equipped)
Intelligent Key door buzzer
∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
(if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any
one of the following improper operations is
found.
∙ Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI)
(if so equipped)
∙ The ignition switch is not returned to the
LOCK position when locking the doors.
∙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
(if so equipped)
∙ The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors.
∙ Distance Control Assist (DCA)
(if so equipped)
∙ The Intelligent Key is taken outside the
vehicle when operating the vehicle.
∙ Blind Spot Intervention (BSI)
(if so equipped)
∙ Any doors are not closed securely when
locking the doors.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check
both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key System. For additional information, refer to
“INFINITI Intelligent Key” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
LIC2205
The vehicle information display is located to
the left of the speedometer. It displays such
items as:
∙ Indicators and warnings
∙ Vehicle settings
∙ Tire pressure information (if so equipped)
∙ Trip computer information
∙ Other information
∙ Drive system warnings and settings
∙ Cruise control system information
(if so equipped)
∙ Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
information (if so equipped)
∙ Intelligent Key operation information
2-16 Instruments and controls
∙ Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)
(if so equipped)
2.
— navigate through the items in
the vehicle information display
ENTER — change or select an item in the
vehicle information display
— go back to the previous menu
3.
buttons also control
The ENTER and
audio and control panel functions. For additional information, refer to “Steering wheel
switch for audio control” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition
systems” section of this manual.
LIC2245
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be navi,
, ENTER ,
gated using the
and
buttons located on the steering
wheel.
1.
— select/enter the vehicle information display menu items or to change
from one display screen to the next (i.e.
trip, TPMS, fuel economy)
To control what items display in the vehicle
information display, refer to “Main menu selection” in this section.
RESETTING THE TRIP
COMPUTER
1. Press the
button until you reach
the trip computer mode.
button again for more
2. Press the
than 1.5 seconds to reset average fuel
consumption, average speed, distance
to empty, and journey time.
STARTUP DISPLAY
SETTINGS
When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC
position the screens that display in the vehicle
information include:
∙ Active system status (if so equipped)
∙ Trip computer
∙ Tire pressure information (if so equipped)
∙ Fuel economy
∙ Warnings
∙ Settings
The setting mode allows you to change the
information displayed in the vehicle information display:
∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
∙ Vehicle Settings
∙ Main Menu Selection
∙ Body Color
∙ Maintenance
∙ Alarms
∙ Language
∙ Unit
∙ Welcome Effects
Warnings will only display if there are any
present. For additional information on warnings and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” in this
section.
Instruments and controls 2-17
Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
The driver assistance menu allows the user to
change the various driving aids.
Menu item
Driving Aids
Result
Displays available driving aids.
Forward
Displays available forward driving aids.
Assistance (DCA)
Lane
Allows user to turn the Distance Control Assist (DCA) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Distance
Control Assist (DCA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Displays available lane driving aids.
Lane
Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Lane
Departure Warning (LDW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Assistance (LDP)
Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Lane
Departure Prevention (LDP) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Blind Spot
Displays available blind spot driving aids and settings.
Blind Spot
Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Assistance (BSI)
Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot
Intervention® (BSI) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Brightness
Allows user to choose between standard (STD), dark or bright settings for the blind spot display.
Back-Up Collision Interv.
Ignition On Status
Emergency Braking
System
2-18 Instruments and controls
Displays available Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) options.
Allows user to turn the Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) system on or off. For additional information, refer to
“Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Displays available emergency braking options.
Allows user to turn the emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Forward Emergency
Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection system” and “Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change
the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys,
and other vehicle settings.
Menu item
Result
Welcome Light
Allows the user the turn the welcome light on or off
Auto Room Lamp
Allows the user to turn the auto room lamp on or off
Light Sensitivity
Allows the user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle
Light Off Delay
Allows the user to change the duration of time, from 0 to 180 seconds, that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off
Rain Sensor (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the rain sensor on or off. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and washer switch” in this
section.
Wiper with Speed
Allows user to turn the wiper with speed feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and washer
switch” in this section.
I-Key Door Lock
Allows user to turn the I-Key door lock on or off
Selective Unlock
Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the door
unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to
be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door
unlock operation is performed once.
Auto Door Lock (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the auto door lock feature on or off. The auto door lock function automatically locks all the
doors based on the user-selected setting.
Off
The doors will not lock automatically.
Vehicle Speed
The doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a certain speed.
Shift out of P
The doors will lock automatically when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
Instruments and controls 2-19
Menu item
Auto Door Unlock (if so equipped)
Result
Allows user to turn the auto door unlock feature on or off. The auto door unlock function automatically unlocks all
the doors based on the user-selected setting.
Off
The doors will not unlock automatically.
IGN Off
The doors will automatically unlock when the ignition is turned off.
Shift into P
The doors will automatically unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Answer Back Horn
Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will
flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. For additional information, refer to “Answer back
horn feature” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
Remote Start (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the remote start on or off. When turned off, the vehicle cannot be started using the Intelligent
Key.
Battery Saver
Allows the user to turn the battery saver feature on or off. When turned on, this feature will turn off the ignition
switch after a period of time if left in the ACC or ON position.
Exit Seat Slide
Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seat backward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle
and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set position. For
additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of
this manual.
Exit Steering Up
Allows the user to turn the exit steering up feature on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the steering
wheel upward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into
the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
2-20 Instruments and controls
Main Menu Selection
The main menu selection menu allows the
user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display when
the ignition is placed in the ON position.
Menu item
Result
Tyre Pressures (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the tire pressures display on or off.
4WD (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the 4WD display on or off.
Audio (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the audio display on or off.
Navigation (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the navigation display on or off.
Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the driver assistance display on or off.
Trip Computer
Allows user to turn the trip computer display on or off.
Fuel Economy
Allows user to turn the fuel economy display on or off.
Body Color
The body color menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the
vehicle information display.
Menu item
Body Color
Result
Allows user to select the color of the vehicle that appears in the vehicle information display
Instruments and controls 2-21
Maintenance
WARNING
The maintenance menu allows the user to set
reminders for various vehicle maintenance
intervals.
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire
pressure checks. For additional information, refer to “Changing wheels and tires” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. Many factors including
tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and
road conditions affect tire wear and when
tires should be replaced. Setting the tire
Menu item
Maintenance
replacement indicator for a certain driving
distance does not mean your tires will last
that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform
regular tire checks. Failure to perform
regular tire checks, including tire pressure
checks could result in tire failure. Serious
vehicle damage could occur and may lead to
a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.
Result
Displays various Maintenance settings
Service
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items like
the engine oil, oil filter and tires. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing the items. You can set
or reset the distance for service type items. For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer to your
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.”
Tyre
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires.
Other
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items
other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire
rotation. The distance for checking or replacing the items can be set or reset.
2-22 Instruments and controls
Alarms
The alarms menu allows the user to set
various alerts.
Menu item
Result
Outside Temp.
Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off.
Timer Alert
Allows user to set the timer alert for a specific interval.
Language
The language menu allows the user to
change the languages displayed in the vehicle
information display.
Menu item
Language
Result
The language of the vehicle information display is displayed in UK English only. The language of the center
display/navigation can be changed independently of the vehicle information display. For additional information
refer to “How to use the Setting Button” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems”
section of this manual.
Units
The units menu allows the user to change the
units shown in the vehicle information display. The units of the center display/
navigation can be changed independently of
the vehicle information display.
For additional information, refer to “How to
use the SETTING button” in the “Monitor,
climate, audio, phone and voice recognition
systems” section of this manual.
Menu item
Mileage
Result
Allows user to select different mileage display units
Tyre Pressures
Allows user to select different pressure display units
Temperature
Allows user to select different temperature display units
Instruments and controls 2-23
Welcome Effect
The welcome effect menu allows the user to
control the welcome effect feature.
Menu item
Welcome Effect
Result
Allows user to turn the welcome effect feature on or off.
Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to
restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.
Menu item
Factory Reset
2-24 Instruments and controls
Result
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the
user can confirm or deny the reset.
LIC3785
Instruments and controls 2-25
VEHICLE INFORMATION
DISPLAY WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
1. No Key Detected
17. AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)
18. AWD High Temp. Stop Vehicle
(if so equipped)
32. Cruise control indicators (if so equipped)
33. INFINITI drive mode selector indicators
34. Distance Control Assist (DCA) indicators
(if so equipped)
2. Key ID Incorrect
19. Tyre Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)
3. Key Battery Low
20. Door Open
4. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual
21. Boot (liftgate) Open
36. Unavailable: Snow Mode Active
(if so equipped)
5. Key Registration Complete
22. Timer Alert – Have a break?
37. Unavailable: VDC OFF (if so equipped)
6. Push brake and start button to drive
23. Low Outside Temperature
7. Push Ignition to OFF
24. Power will turn off to save the battery
38. Unavailable: High Cabin Temp.
(if so equipped)
8. Shift to Park
25. Turn off the lights
9. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key
system (if I-Key battery level is low)
26. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s Manual
10. Release Parking Brake
11. Low Fuel
12. Loose Fuel Cap
27. Predictive Forward Collision Warning
(PFCW) indicator (if so equipped)
28. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
indicator (if so equipped)
35. Unavailable: Road is slippery
(if so equipped)
39. Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction
(if so equipped)
40. Unavailable: High Accelerator Temp.
(if so equipped)
41. Unavailable: Front radar blocked
(if so equipped)
42. BCI OFF (if so equipped)
14. Low Washer Fluid
29. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and
Rear Cross Traffic alert (RCTA) indicator
(if so equipped)
15. Tyre Pressure Low - Add Air
(if so equipped)
30. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)
45. Rear Door Alert is activated
(if so equipped)
16. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)
31. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
indicators (if so equipped)
46. Check Back Seat For All Articles
(if so equipped)
13. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual
2-26 Instruments and controls
43. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
44. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual
No Key Detected
I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual
Push Ignition to OFF
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition
switch in the ON or ACC position. Make sure
the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, this light comes on for a period of
time and then turns off.
After the Push Ignition to OFF warning illuminates, the warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC position
when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
For additional information, refer to “INFINITI
Intelligent Key System” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition
switch is placed from the OFF position and
the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the
system. You cannot start the engine with an
unregistered key.
For additional information, refer to “INFINITI
Intelligent Key System” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
Key Battery Low
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent
Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
The I-Key System Error message warns of a
malfunction with the Intelligent Key system.
If the light comes on while the engine is
stopped, it may be impossible to start the
engine.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However in
these cases, have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Key Registration Complete
This appears when a new Intelligent Key is
registered to the vehicle.
Push brake and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever is
in the P (Park) position.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in the
LOCK position.
Shift to Park
This warning illuminates when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the
shift lever is in any position other than P
(Park). Also, a chime sounds when the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
If this warning illuminates, move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position or start the
engine.
For additional information, refer to “INFINITI
Intelligent Key System” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
This indicator means that the engine will start
by pushing the ignition switch with the brake
pedal depressed. You can start the engine
from any position of the ignition switch.
Instruments and controls 2-27
Engine start operation for Intelligent Key
system (if I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator appears when the battery of
the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not
communicating normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch with
the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake
pedal. For additional information, refer to
“INFINITI Intelligent Key battery discharge” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Release Parking Brake
This warning illuminates in the message area
of the vehicle information display when the
parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
Low Fuel
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as
it is convenient, preferably before the fuel
gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a
small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap
is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has
been refueled. For additional information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears in the message area of
the vehicle information display if low oil pressure is detected. This gauge is not designed
to indicate low oil level. The low oil pressure
warning is not designed to indicate a low oil
level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level.
For additional information, refer to “Engine
oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
Low Washer Fluid
This warning illuminates when the
windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add
windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For
additional information, refer to “Windshieldwasher fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.
Tyre Pressure Low - Add Air
(if so equipped)
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates
and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four
tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the tire placard. For additional
information, refer to “Low tire pressure
warning light” in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)
This warning appears when there is an error
with your TPMS. If this warning comes on,
have the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)
This warning appears when the all-wheel
drive system is not functioning properly while
the engine is running.
2-28 Instruments and controls
AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle
(if so equipped)
This warning may appear while trying to free
a stuck vehicle due to increased oil temperature. The driving mode may change to
2-Wheel Drive (2WD). If this warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with the engine idling,
as soon as it is safe to do so. Then if the
warning turns off, you can continue driving.
Tyre Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)
This warning may appear if there is a large
difference between the diameters of the
front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a
safe area, with the engine idling. Check that
all the tire sizes are the same, that the tire
pressure is correct and that the tires are not
excessively worn.
Door Open
This warning illuminates when a door has
been opened.
Boot (liftgate) Open
This warning illuminates when the boot (liftgate) has been opened.
Timer Alert — Have a break?
Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s Manual
This indicator appears when the set time is
reached. The time can be set up to six hours.
For additional information, refer to “Settings”
in this section.
This warning illuminates when there is an
error with the system. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 3°C (37°F). The temperature
can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, refer to
“Settings” in this section.
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON position
and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional
information, refer to “Push-button ignition
switch positions” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Turn off the lights
This warning appears when the headlights
are left in the ON position when exiting the
vehicle. Place the headlight switch to OFF or
AUTO position. For additional information,
refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in
this section.
Predictive Forward Collision Warning
(PFCW) indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows when the PFCW system
is engaged.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator
(if so equipped)
This indicator shows when the LDW system
is engaged.
For additional information, refer to ”Warning
systems switch” in this section and “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator
(if so equipped)
This indicator shows when the BSW and
RCTA systems are engaged.
For additional information, refer to “Blind
Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic
Instruments and controls 2-29
Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)
This warning appears when one or more of
the following systems (if so equipped) is not
functioning properly:
∙ Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)
∙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
∙ Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)
∙ Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)
∙ Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
∙ Distance Control Assist (DCA)
Cruise control indicators (if so equipped)
These indicators show the cruise control system status.
For additional information, refer to “Cruise
control” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
INFINITI Drive Mode Selector indicators
These indicators show the current drive
mode of the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “INFINITI
Drive Mode Selector” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Distance Control Assist (DCA) indicators
(if so equipped)
If one or more of these warning appears,
have the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
These indicators show the Distance Control
Assist (DCA) system status. For additional
information, refer to “Distance Control Assist
(DCA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators
(if so equipped)
Unavailable: Road is slippery
(if so equipped)
These indicators show the Intelligent Cruise
Control (ICC) system status. For additional
information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
This message appears when the Distance
Control Assist (DCA) system becomes unavailable because the road is slippery. For
additional information, refer to “Distance
2-30 Instruments and controls
Control Assist (DCA)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: Snow Mode Active
(if so equipped)
This message appears when the Distance
Control Assist (DCA) system becomes unavailable because the SNOW Mode is selected. For additional information, refer to
“Distance Control Assist (DCA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: VDC OFF (if so equipped)
This message appears when the Distance
Control Assist (DCA) system becomes unavailable because the VDC is turned off. For
additional information, refer to “Distance
Control Assist (DCA)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: High Cabin Temp.
(if so equipped)
This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than
approximately 104°F (40°C). For additional
information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction
(if so equipped)
This message appears when the Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) or Back-up Collision Intervention
(BCI) systems become unavailable because a
radar blockage is detected. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning
(BSW)”, “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” or
“Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: High Accelerator Temp.
(if so equipped)
This message appears when the Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) system becomes unavailable because of an interior temperature
greater than approximately 104°F (40°C).
For additional information, refer to “Backup
Collision Intervention (BCI)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: Front radar blocked
(if so equipped)
This message appears when the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC) or Distance Control Assist (DCA) systems become unavailable because the front radar is obstructed.
For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” or “Distance Control Assist (DCA)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
BCI OFF (if so equipped)
This message appears when the Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) system is turned off
using the BCI switch. For additional information, refer to “Backup Collision Intervention
(BCI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended
storage switch is not pushed in. When this
warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, refer to “Extended storage switch” in this section.
CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual
This warning illuminates when there is a
problem with the CVT system. If this warning
comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer
for this service.
Rear Door Alert is activated (if so equipped)
When the system is enabled, this message
appears when the rear door alert system is
active and can remind the driver to check the
back seat.
∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a driver
can select “Dismiss Message” to clear the
display for a period of time. If no selection
is made, this message automatically turns
off after a period of time.
∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a driver
can select “Disable Alert” to disable the
horn alert for the remainder of the current trip.
WARNING
Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a stop
within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turning the system off. Alerts* can be provided for other
stops during the trip. Selecting “Disable
Alert” turns off the Rear Door Alert system
for the remainder of a trip and no audible
alert will be provided.
Instruments and controls 2-31
SECURITY SYSTEMS
NOTE:
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of
interior or exterior vehicle components in all
situations. Always secure your vehicle even if
parking for a brief period. Never leave your
Intelligent Key in the vehicle, and always lock
the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of
your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit
areas whenever possible.
This system is disabled until a driver enables
it using the vehicle information display. For
additional information, refer to “How to use
the vehicle information display” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “Rear
Door Alert” in this section.
Check Back Seat For All Articles
(if so equipped)
When the system is enabled, this message
appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the
D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, and the
driver exits the vehicle. This message alerts
the driver, after a period of time, to check for
items in the rear seat after the audible alert
has been provided.
Your vehicle has two types of security systems:
NOTE:
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
This system is disabled until a driver enables
it using the vehicle information display. For
additional information, refer to “How to use
the vehicle information display” in this section.
The vehicle security system provides visual
and audible alarm signals if someone opens
the doors, liftgate or hood when the system is
armed. It is not, however, a motion detection
type system that activates when a vehicle is
moved or when a vibration occurs.
For additional information, refer to “Rear
Door Alert” in this section.
2-32 Instruments and controls
LIC0661
∙ Vehicle security system
∙ INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
Many devices offering additional protection,
such as component locks, identification
markers, and tracking systems, are available
at auto supply stores and specialty shops. An
INFINITI retailer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to
see if you may be eligible for discounts for
various theft protection features.
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows and the moonroof.
The system can be armed even if the
windows and moonroof are open.
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock
all doors. The doors can be locked with
the Intelligent Key, door handle request
switch or power door lock switch.
Key fob operation:
4. Confirm that the
indicator light
indicator stays illucomes on. The
minated for a period of time indicating
that the system is in the pre-armed
phase.
indicator light will blink every
The
3 seconds once the security system is
armed.
If during the pre-armed phase one of the
following occurs, the system will not
arm:
∙ Any door is unlocked with the mechanical key
∙ A door is opened with the release button with the Intelligent Key on your
person
∙ The doors are unlocked using the unlock button on the Intelligent Key
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or ON position
∙ Even when the driver and/or passengers
are in the vehicle, the system will activate when all the doors, hood and liftgate are locked with the ignition switch
placed in the LOCK position. When placing the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, the system will be released.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:
∙ The turn signals blink and the horn
sounds intermittently.
∙ The alarm automatically turns off after a
period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door or liftgate with
button
the key, or by pressing the
on the Intelligent Key.
The alarm is activated by:
∙ opening the door or liftgate without using the key or Intelligent Key (even if the
door is unlocked by releasing the door
inside lock switch).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door or the liftgate with the key, pressing
button on the Intelligent Key, or
the
pressing the request switch on the driver’s or
passenger’s door with the Intelligent Key in
range of the door handle.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will
not allow the engine to start without the use
of a registered INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System key (for
example, when interference is caused by another INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart
the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
Instruments and controls 2-33
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI
recommends placing the registered INFINITI
Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate
key ring to avoid interference from other devices.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Low power radio frequency devices:
NOTE:
This device complies with SASO 1322/1997
(Low Power Radio Frequency Devices.) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) any interference
received by the device must be accepted.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Any change or modification in the device
which may cause the device to operate outside the permitted limits of this standard
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
The concerned authorities have the right to
inspect the device and in case of complaints
of harmful interference caused by the device, it shall be liable to be forfeited.
2-34 Instruments and controls
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
LIC0474
Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever the
ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC
position. This function indicates the INFINITI
Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.
If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, the light will remain on while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the engine
will not start, seek service for the INFINITI
Vehicle Immobilizer System as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that
you have. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
∙ Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based windshield-washer
fluid concentrates may permanently
stain the grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
LIC2897
SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the
defogger before you wash the windshield.
CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring the
fluid into the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir. Do not use the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir to mix the
windshield-washer fluid concentrate and
water.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
turn the wiper switch to the OFF position
and remove the snow or ice that is on and
around the wiper arms. In approximately
1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate
the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at
the following speed:
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
Intermittent (AUTO) — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the
A (Slower) or 䊊
B (Faster).
knob toward 䊊
Also, the intermittent operation speed
varies in accordance with the vehicle
speed. (For example, when the vehicle
speed is high, the intermittent operation
speed will be faster.) Further, the rainsensing feature will adjust the speed of
the intermittent operation. For additional
information, refer to “Rain-sensing auto
wiper system” in this section.
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation
4 to have one sweep
Push the lever up 䊊
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
Instruments and controls 2-35
NOTE:
∙ The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended for use during rain. If the switch is
left in the AUTO position, the wipers may
operate unexpectedly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck on or
around the sensor. The wipers may also
operate when exhaust gas or moisture
affect the rain sensor.
The wiper with speed feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to
“Vehicle information display” in this section.
∙ When the windshield glass is coated with
water repellent, the speed of the rainsensing auto wipers may be higher even
though the amount of the rainfall is small.
LIC2901
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ Do not touch the rain sensor and around
it when the wiper switch is in the AUTO
position and the ignition switch is in the
ON position. The wipers may operate unexpectedly and cause an injury or may
damage a wiper.
2-36 Instruments and controls
∙ Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto
wiper system when you use a car wash.
∙ The rain-sensing auto wipers may not
operate if rain does not hit the rain sensor
even if it is raining.
∙ Using Genuine NISSAN wiper blades is
recommended for proper operation of
the rain-sensing auto wiper system. For
additional information, refer to “Windshield wiper blades” in the “Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
The rain-sensing auto wiper system can automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the
wiper speed depending on the rainfall and the
vehicle speed by using the rain sensor located
on the upper part of the windshield.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based windshield-washer
fluid concentrates may permanently
stain the grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system,
1 . The
place the lever in the AUTO position 䊊
wiper will sweep once while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by turning the knob toward the front
2 (High) or toward the rear 䊊
3 (Low).
䊊
– High — High sensitive operation
– Low — Low sensitive operation
To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system
off, rotate the lever to the OFF position, or
rotate the lever to the LO or HI position.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensor may be disabled. For additional information, refer to “How to use the
vehicle information display” in this section.
LIC3129
REAR SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the rear window and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the rear window with the
defogger before you wash the rear window.
CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring the
fluid into the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir. Do not use the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir to mix the
windshield-washer fluid concentrate and
water.
If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may stop
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove the
snow, etc. on and around the wiper arms.
After about 1 minute, turn the switch on
again to operate the wiper.
The rear window wiper and washer operate
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper.
Instruments and controls 2-37
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR DEFOGGER SWITCH
1
䊊
2
䊊
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation (not adjustable)
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defogger.
Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation
3 to operate the
Push the switch forward 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
NOTE:
The top and bottom few rows of wires on the
rear window are not part of the rear window
defogger system. These wires make up the
antenna for the audio system.
LIC2923
To defog the rear window glass and outside
mirrors, start the engine and push the rear
window defogger switch on. The rear window defogger indicator light on the switch
comes on. Push the switch again to turn the
defogger off.
The rear window defogger automatically
turns off after approximately 15 minutes.
2-38 Instruments and controls
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
XENON HEADLIGHTS
WARNING
cHIGH
VOLTAGE
∙ When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or
disassemble. Always have your xenon
headlights replaced by a certified service
technician. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ Xenon headlights provide considerably
more light than conventional headlights.
If they are not correctly aimed, they
might temporarily blind an oncoming
driver or the driver ahead of you and
cause a serious accident. If headlights are
not aimed correctly, immediately take
your vehicle to a certified service technician and have the headlights adjusted
correctly.
When the xenon headlight is initially turned
on, its brightness or color varies slightly.
However, the color and brightness will soon
stabilize.
∙ The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off operation.
It is generally desirable not to turn off
the headlights for short intervals (for example, when the vehicle stops at a traffic
signal).
∙ If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start blinking, or the color of the light will become
reddish. If one or more of the above signs
appear, it is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for service.
SIC3267
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
䊊
2
䊊
Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the side, tail, license plate, and instrument panel lights will come on.
Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running
to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
Instruments and controls 2-39
NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the time
delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
1 .
position 䊊
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
LIC3188
Autolight system
The autolight system allows the headlights to
turn on and off automatically. The autolight
system can:
∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights
automatically when it is dark.
∙ Turn off all the lights (except daylight
running lights) when it is light.
∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time
after you place the ignition switch in the
OFF position and all doors are closed.
2-40 Instruments and controls
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position and a door is opened and left
open, the headlights remain on for a period of
time. If another door is opened while the
headlights are on, then the timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
, or
position.
switch to the OFF,
LIC2237
Be sure you do not put anything on top of the
1 of
autolight sensor located in the top side 䊊
the instrument panel. The autolight sensor
controls the autolight; if it is covered, the
autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and
the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs
while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your
vehicle’s battery could become discharged.
High Beam Assist (if so equipped)
The High Beam Assist system will operate
when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If
an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be
switched to the low beam automatically.
WARNING
LIC3250
Headlight beam select
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
∙ The High Beam Assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for safe
driving operation. The driver should remain alert at all times, ensure safe driving
practices and switch the high beams and
low beam manually when necessary.
– When the headlights of the oncoming
vehicle or the leading vehicle are
turned off, when the color of the light
is affected due to foreign materials on
the lights, or when the light beam is
out of position.
– When there is a sudden, continuous
change in brightness.
– When driving on a road that passes
over rolling hills, or a road that has
level differences.
– When driving on a road with many
curves.
– When a sign or mirror-like surface is
reflecting intense light towards the
front of the vehicle.
To select the high beam function, push
the lever forward while the low beams
are on. The high beam lights come on and
indicator light illuminates.
the
∙ The high beam or low beam may not
switch automatically under the following
conditions. Switch the high beam and low
beam manually.
Pull the lever back to return to the low
beam.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
wind, etc.).
– When a headlight on your vehicle is
damaged or dirty.
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off. The low
beams do not need to be on for this to
function.
– When a light source similar to a headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the
vehicle.
– When the vehicle is leaning at an angle
due to a punctured tire, being towed,
etc.
– When the container, etc. being towed
by a leading vehicle is reflecting intense light.
Instruments and controls 2-41
When the vehicle speed lowers to less than
approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the headlight uses the low beam.
To turn off the High Beam Assist system, turn
position or
the headlight switch to the
select the low beam position by placing the
lever in the neutral position.
∙ The timing of switching the low beam and
high beam may change under the following situations.
– The brightness of the headlights of
the oncoming vehicle or leading
vehicle.
– The movement and direction of the
oncoming vehicle and the leading
vehicle.
– When only one light on the oncoming
vehicle or the leading vehicle is
illuminated.
– When the oncoming vehicle or the
leading vehicle is a two-wheeled
vehicle.
– Road conditions (incline, curve, the
road surface, etc.).
– The number of passengers and the
amount of luggage.
LIC3618
High Beam Assist operation
To activate the High Beam Assist system,
turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi1 and push the lever forward 䊊
2 (high
tion 䊊
beam position). The High Beam Assist indicator light in the meter will illuminate while the
headlights are turned on.
If the High Beam Assist indicator light does
not illuminate in the above condition, it may
indicate that the system is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer
for this service.
2-42 Instruments and controls
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around
the ambient image sensor. Do not touch
the sensor lens that is located on the
ambient image sensor.
If the ambient image sensor is damaged due
to an accident, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer.
Battery saver system
The battery saver system automatically turns
off the ignition after a period of time when
the ignition switch is left in the ACC or ON
position.
LIC3638
Ambient image sensor maintenance
1 for the High
The ambient image sensor 䊊
Beam Assist system is located in front of the
inside mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the High Beam Assist system and
prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the windshield clean.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the ambient image sensor.
The battery saver system automatically turns
off the following lights after a period of time
when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and the doors are closed:
∙ Headlights, when the headlight switch is
or
position
in the
∙ Interior lights, when left in the ON position
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT
SYSTEM
The daytime running lights automatically illuminate when the engine is started with the
parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
position. Turn
OFF position or in the
the headlight switch to the
position for
full illumination when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the daytime running lights
do not illuminate. The daytime running lights
illuminate when the parking brake is released.
The daytime running lights will remain on until
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or headlight switch is turned to the
position.
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on.
It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
Instruments and controls 2-43
Lane change signal
2
䊊
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch.
The turn signal will flash three times automatically.
LIC2235
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
A to increase the brightPress the “+” button 䊊
ness of instrument panel lights.
B to decrease the
Press the “-” button 䊊
brightness of instrument panel lights.
2-44 Instruments and controls
LIC3252
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
1
䊊
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.
HORN
SIC3272
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
To turn the fog lights on, rotate the headlight
switch to the
position, then rotate the
fog light switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight
switch in the AUTO position, the headlights
must be on, then rotate the fog light switch to
position.
the
To turn the fog lights off, rotate the fog light
switch to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high
beam headlights are selected.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT
SWITCHES (if so equipped)
LIC2227
To sound the horn, push the center pad area
of the steering wheel.
SIC4334
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
climate controlled seats if you or the occupants can not monitor seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in those body
parts in contact with the seat. Use of the
climate controlled seats by such people
could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ The battery could run down if the climate
control seat is operated while the engine
is not running.
Instruments and controls 2-45
HEATED SEAT SWITCHES
(if so equipped)
∙ Do not use the climate control seat for
extended periods or when no one is using
the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may
become overheated.
The climate controlled seat warms up or
cools down the front seat by blowing warm
or cool air from under the surface of the seat.
The climate control switch is located on the
center console.
The climate controlled seat can be operated
as follows:
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
objects. This may result in damage to the
climate controlled seat.
1. Start the engine.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the seat should be
removed immediately with a dry cloth
3. Adjust the desired amount of air using
the control knob. The climate controlled
seat blower remains on low speed for
approximately 60 seconds after turning
the switch on or selecting the desired
temperature.
∙ The climate controlled seat has an air filter. Do not operate the climate controlled
seat without an air filter. This may result
in damage to the system.
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar
materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the climate controlled seat does not operate,
turn the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
2-46 Instruments and controls
A to the heat side
2. Turn the control knob 䊊
1 or the cool side 䊊
2 . The indicator light
䊊
B on the control knob will illuminate.
䊊
4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or
cooled, or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the control knob to the
OFF (center) position. The indicator light
B on the control knob goes off with the
䊊
switch in the OFF (center) position.
To check the air filter for the climate controlled seat, it is recommended that you contact an INFINITI retailer.
SSS0911
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
monitor elevated seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in body parts
that contact the seat. Use of the seat
heater by such people could result in serious
injury.
HEATED 2ND ROW SEAT SWITCHES
(if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is not
running.
∙ Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may
become overheated.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar
materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches are located on the center
console and can be operated independently
of each other.
1. Start the engine.
A to the right 䊊
1
2. Turn the control knob 䊊
and select the desired heat range.
∙ For high heat, turn the knob to the
1 .
right 䊊
∙ For low heat, turn the knob to the left
2 .
䊊
B will illuminate
∙ The indicator light 䊊
when the heater is on.
3. To turn off the heater, return the knob to
3 . Make sure that the
the OFF position 䊊
indicator light turns off.
The heater is controlled by a control
module, automatically turning the heater
on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long
as the switch is on.
LIC3037
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
monitor elevated seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in body parts
that contact the seat. Use of the seat
heater by such people could result in serious
injury.
When the seat is warmed, or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
switch off.
Instruments and controls 2-47
HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH
(if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is not
running.
∙ Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may
become overheated.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
The rear seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches are located on the rear of
the front center console and can be operated
independently of each other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
as desired. The indicator light in the
switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and
off. The indicator light will remain on as
long as the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
switch off.
LIC0421
The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F
(20°C).
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar
materials.
Push the heated steering wheel switch to
warm the steering wheel after the engine
starts. The indicator light will come on.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will
heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on
to maintain a temperature above 68°F
(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as
long as the system is on.
2-48 Instruments and controls
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
Push the switch again to turn the heated
steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will go off.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch
is turned on, the system will not heat the
steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.
LIC3344
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be
reduced even if the accelerator is depressed
to the floor. If maximum engine power is
needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC
system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
indicator will come
OFF switch. The
on.
Instruments and controls 2-49
REAR DOOR ALERT (if so equipped)
The rear door alert system functions under
certain conditions to indicate there may be an
object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check
the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle.
The rear door alert system is initially disabled.
The driver can enable the system using the
vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” in this section.
When the system is enabled:
∙ The system is activated when a rear door
is opened and closed approximately
10 minutes before the vehicle is started.
When the vehicle is started and the system is activated, a visual message appears in the vehicle information display.
For additional information, refer to “Rear
Door Alert is activated” in this section.
∙ If a rear door is opened and closed but
the vehicle is not started within approximately 10 minutes, the system will not be
activated. A rear door must be opened
and closed and the car started within
10 minutes for the system to activate.
2-50 Instruments and controls
When the rear door alert system is activated
and a driver exits the vehicle after arriving at a
destination:
∙ When the driver puts the vehicle in the P
(Park) position, a message appears in the
vehicle information display for a driver to
“Dismiss Message” or “Disable Alert” if
desired.
∙ With the system enabled, when the driver
exits the vehicle, an audible alert (horn
sound) will occur unless a rear door is
opened and closed within a short time to
deactivate the alert.
∙ If the doors are locked before the alert is
deactivated by opening a rear door, the
horn will sound.
WARNING
• If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, no audible alert will be provided regardless of
rear door open/close status.
• There may be times when there is an object
or passenger in the rear seat(s) but the audible alert does not sound. For example,
this may occur if the engine is turned off
and then on again in a short period of time
during a trip, or if rear seat passengers enter or exit the vehicle during a trip.
• The system does not directly detect objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a rear door is
opened and closed, indicating that there
may be something in the rear seat(s).
∙ If the system is activated but the rear
liftgate is opened before opening a rear
door, the horn will be delayed until after
the liftgate is closed.
NOTE:
∙ If the audible horn alert occurs, a message will also appear in the vehicle information display that states, “Check Back
Seat for All Articles”.
For additional information, refer to “Rear
Door Alert is activated” in this section.
There may be times when the horn sounds
but there are no objects or passengers in the
rear seat(s).
WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH
(if so equipped)
POWER INVERTER SWITCH
(if so equipped)
When the warning systems switch is turned
1 on the switch is off. The
off, the indicator 䊊
indicator will also be off if the warning system is deactivated using the settings menu.
The LDW system warns the driver with a
warning light and chime that the vehicle is
beginning to leave the driving lane.For additional information, refer to “Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
LIC2225
WARNING
When this switch is activated the following
Warning Systems (if so equipped) are
turned off and will not work.
∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
∙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
The warning systems switch is used to turn
on and off the warning systems (Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Blind Spot Warning
(BSW), and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA))
that are activated (if equipped) using the settings menu on the vehicle information display.
The BSW system will turn on the side indicator light, located next to the outside mirrors, if
the radar detects a vehicle in the detection
zone. If the turn signal is activated in the
direction of the detected vehicle, a chime
sounds twice and the side indicator light will
flash. For additional information, refer to
“Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of
an approaching vehicle when the driver is
backing out of a parking space. If the system
detects an approaching vehicle from either
side, the system chimes (once) and the side
BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the
side the vehicle is approaching from. For additional information, refer to “Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
LIC2231
To use the outlets for devices that require
120v power, place the ignition in the ON
position and push the power inverter switch.
The switch will illuminate when enabled.
CAUTION
∙ Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
∙ Do not attempt to use this while driving.
∙ Do not use double adapters or more than
one electrical accessory, doing so could
significantly drain the battery of your
vehicle.
Instruments and controls 2-51
POWER OUTLETS
LIC3624
Instrument Panel
12V OUTLETS
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
The power outlets are powered only when
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
LIC2885
Center Console
LIC2207
2nd Row
CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during or
immediately after use.
∙ Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for additional information.
∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a
12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
2-52 Instruments and controls
∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good
contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse
may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the cap.
Do not allow water or any other liquid to
contact the outlet.
LIC2236
Cargo Area
∙ Do not use double adapters or more than
one electrical accessory.
LIC2215
2nd Row
120V OUTLET (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during or
immediately after use.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defogger is on.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,
be sure the electrical accessory being
used is turned off.
∙ Do not use accessories that exceed a
120V, 150W power draw. Do not use
double adaptors or more than one electrical accessory.
Instruments and controls 2-53
CIGARETTE LIGHTER (if so equipped)
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defogger is on.
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during or
immediately after use.
∙ Do not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,
be sure the electrical accessory being
used is turned off.
∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a
12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not
use double adapters or more than one
electrical accessory.
∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good
contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse
may open.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the cap.
Do not allow water or any other liquid to
contact the outlet.
LIC3362
This power outlet can be used with an accessory cigarette lighter element. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for
additional information.
This power outlet can also be used for powering electrical accessories such as cellular
telephones.
The cup holder type ashtrays are for use in
the 1st and 2nd row cup holders only.
CAUTION
∙ The cigarette lighter should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
2-54 Instruments and controls
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defogger is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,
be sure the electrical accessory being
used is turned OFF.
∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good
contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse
may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the cap.
Do not allow water or any other liquids to
contact the outlet.
EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH
LIC3266
LDI2758
The extended storage switch is pulled out
when in transit from the factory to the retailer. It is located in the fuse panel to the left
of the steering wheel on the instrument
panel. If any electrical equipment does not
operate, ensure the extended storage switch
is pushed fully in place, as shown.
Pulled position
LIC3268
Pushed position
Instruments and controls 2-55
STORAGE
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System,
please observe the following items:
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat
to push or pull on the seatback pocket or
head restraint.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint or in the seatback pocket.
LIC3546
FRONT-DOOR POCKETS
LIC1328
SEATBACK POCKETS
There is a seatback pocket located on the
back of the driver and passenger seats. The
pockets can be used to store maps.
2-56 Instruments and controls
LIC3282
Front console
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to
help prevent injury in an accident or sudden
stop.
LIC2214
Rear armrest
LIC2243
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use
1 or unlocking
the master key when locking 䊊
2 the glove box.
䊊
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.
Instruments and controls 2-57
LIC3654
LIC3655
CONSOLE BOX
Lower half
Upper half
Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open
the lower half of the console box. A power
outlet is located inside the console box and
there is storage for compact discs.
Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the
upper half of the console box.
The upper half of the console box may be
used for storage of cellular phones. An access
hole is provided at the front of the upper half
of the console box for a phone or iPod® cord
routing to the power outlet.
2-58 Instruments and controls
SIC4344
OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES
STORAGE
1 and
To open the sunglasses holder, push 䊊
release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the
holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s
view and to help prevent an accident.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses
holder while parking in direct sunlight.
The heat may damage the sunglasses.
LIC3623
Front console
CUP HOLDERS
LIC2212
2nd row
WARNING
∙ Do not recline the 2nd row seatback
when you use the cup holders on the rear
armrest. Doing so may cause the beverages to spill over, and if they are hot, they
may scald the passengers.
∙ Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can
scald you or your passenger.
Instruments and controls 2-59
LIC3514
3rd row
CAUTION
Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard
objects can injure you in an accident.
LIC2209
Bottle holder — front
CAUTION
∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in the
vehicle and possibly injure people during
sudden braking or an accident.
∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
2-60 Instruments and controls
LIC2210
Bottle holder — rear
LIC2244
Type A (if so equipped)
CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN
To access the floor storage area (Type A),
1 to raise the handle, then pull
push down 䊊
up on the handle to lift the luggage board.
To access the floor storage area (Type B),
raise the handle.
LIC3513
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3684
LUGGAGE HOOKS
When securing items using luggage hooks
located on the side finisher do not apply a
load over more than 29 N (6.5 lbs.) to a single
hook.
The luggage hooks that are located on the
floor should have loads less than 490 N
(110 lbs.) to a single hook.
The luggage hooks can be used to secure
cargo with ropes or other types of straps.
Instruments and controls 2-61
and rear). For additional information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
WARNING
∙ Always install the cross bars onto the
roof side rails before loading cargo of any
kind. Loading cargo directly onto the
roof side rails or the vehicle’s roof may
cause vehicle damage.
∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure
cargo.
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage
area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
∙ The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in the
cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo
area. Your child could be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the top tether
strap is damaged.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
LIC2386
ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
Do not apply any load directly to the roof side
rails. Cross bars must be installed before applying load/cargo/luggage to the roof of the
vehicle. Genuine NISSAN accessory cross
bars are available through an INFINITI retailer. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for additional information.
The service load capacity for the roof side
rails is 165 lbs. (74 kg), however do not exceed the accessory cross bars load capacity.
Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or
its Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front
2-62 Instruments and controls
∙ Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is
loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity, especially if the significant portion of
that load is carried on the cross bars.
∙ Heavy loading of the cross bars has the
potential to affect the vehicle stability
and handling during sudden or unusual
handling maneuvers.
∙ Roof rack cross bars should be evenly
distributed.
∙ Do not exceed maximum roof rack cross
bars load capacity.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close the front and
rear passenger windows.
WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in
motion and before closing the windows.
Use the window lock switch to prevent
unexpected use of the power windows.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door
lock activation, do not leave children,
people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Additionally, the temperature inside a
closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly
become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and
pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or for
a period of time after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s or
passenger’s door is opened during this period
of time, the power to the windows is canceled.
The window can be partially opened by pushA down lightly to the first
ing the switch 䊊
detent until the desired window position is
reached. To close the window partially, pull
B up until the desired window
the switch 䊊
position is reached.
Locking passengers’ windows
SIC4352
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Driver side automatic switch
Front passenger side automatic
switch
Left rear passenger automatic
switch
Right rear passenger automatic
switch
Window lock button
C is deWhen the window lock button 䊊
pressed, only the driver’s side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the
window lock function.
Instruments and controls 2-63
SIC4353
Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates
only the corresponding passenger’s window.
To open the window partially, push the
switch down lightly to the first detent until
the desired window position is reached. To
close the window partially, pull the switch up
until the desired window position is reached.
2-64 Instruments and controls
LIC0410
LIC0410
Rear power window switch
Automatic operation
The rear power window switches open or
close only the corresponding windows. To
partially open the window, push the switch
down lightly to the first detent until the desired window position is reached. To partially
close the window, pull the switch up lightly
until the desired window position is reached.
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window switch
down to the second detent and release it; it
need not be held. The window automatically
opens all the way. To stop the window, lift
the switch up while the window is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the
second detent and release it; it need not be
held. To stop the window, push the switch
down while the window is closing.
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated
when a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the
vehicle before closing the window.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced, or jump started, the power window
auto-reverse function may not operate properly. If this occurs, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer to re-initialize the
power window auto-reverse system.
If the control unit detects something caught
in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.
When power window switch does
not operate
If the power window automatic function
(closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the
power window system:
If the power window function does not operate properly after performing the above procedure have the system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Open the window more than halfway by
operating the power window switch.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold
it to close the window, and then hold the
switch more than 3 seconds after the
window is closed.
4. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic
function to confirm the initialization is
complete. The power window automatically opens or closes depending on if the
automatic down or up function is selected.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for
other windows.
Instruments and controls 2-65
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
To stop the roof, push the switch once more
while it is opening or closing.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push
1 and rethe switch to the tilt up position 䊊
lease it; it need not be held. To tilt down the
moonroof, push the switch to the tilt down
2 .
position 䊊
Resetting the moonroof switch
LIC2313
POWER MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The power moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the
driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is
opened during this period of time, the power
to the moonroof is canceled.
Sliding the moonroof
To fully open or close the moonroof, push the
2 or close 䊊
1 position
switch to the open 䊊
and release it; it need not be held. The roof
will automatically open or close all the way.
2-66 Instruments and controls
If the moonroof does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize
the moonroof operation system.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Press and hold the moonroof tilt switch
forward until the moonroof stops.
3. Release the moonroof switch.
4. Press and hold the tilt up switch within
6 seconds.
5. The roof glass will Tilt-Down, SlideClose, Slide-Open, Slide-Close, Tilt-Up,
Tilt-Down.
6. Release the switch; initialization is complete if the moonroof operates normally.
If the moonroof does not operate properly
after performing the procedure above, have
your vehicle checked. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Auto-reverse function (when
closing or tilting down the
moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated
when the moonroof is closed or tilted down
by automatic operation when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position or for a
period of time after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the
vehicle before closing the moonroof.
DUAL PANEL MOONROOF
(if so equipped)
When closing
CAUTION
If the control unit detects something caught
in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the
moonroof will immediately open backward.
When tilting down
If the control unit detects something caught
in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions
and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within
5 seconds after it happens; the moonroof will
fully close gradually. Make sure nothing is
caught in the moonroof.
WARNING
∙ In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the
moonroof opening while the vehicle is in
motion or while the moonroof is closing.
∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
∙ Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area.
Sunshade
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it
forward or backward.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It
is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
LIC2313
POWER MOONROOF
The front moonroof is a power moonroof,
the rear moonroof is fixed glass. The power
moonroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
moonroof is operational for a period of time,
even if the ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or
the front passenger’s door is opened during
this period of time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.
Instruments and controls 2-67
Sliding the moonroof
Resetting the moonroof switch
To slide the moonroof:
If the moonroof does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize
the moonroof operation system.
∙ To fully open the moonroof, push the
1 toward the open position until
switch 䊊
it reaches the second detent. If the switch
1 is pushed to the first detent, only the
䊊
sunshade will open.
∙ To fully close the moonroof, push the
2 toward the close position until
switch 䊊
it reaches the second detent. If the switch
2 is pushed to the first detent, the
䊊
moonroof will close but the sunshade will
remain open.
∙ To open or close the moonroof part way,
1 or 䊊
2 while the
release the switch 䊊
moonroof is sliding open or closed. The
moonroof will stop at the desired position.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push
1 and rethe switch to the tilt up position 䊊
lease it; it need not be held. To tilt down the
moonroof, push the switch to the tilt down
2 .
position 䊊
2-68 Instruments and controls
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Press and hold the moonroof tilt switch
forward until the moonroof stops.
3. Release the moonroof switch.
4. Press and hold the tilt up switch within
6 seconds.
5. The roof glass will Tilt-Down, SlideClose, Slide-Open, Slide-Close, Tilt-Up,
Tilt-Down.
6. Release the switch; initialization is complete if the moonroof operates normally.
If the moonroof does not operate properly
after performing the procedure above, have
your vehicle checked. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Auto-reverse function
(when closing or tilting down
the moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated
when the moonroof is closed or tilted down
by automatic operation when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position or for a
period of time after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the
vehicle before closing the moonroof.
When closing
If the control unit detects something caught
in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the
moonroof will immediately open backward.
When tilting down
If the moonroof does not close
If the control unit detects something caught
in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.
Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It
is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions
and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within
5 seconds after it happens; the moonroof will
fully close gradually. Make sure nothing is
caught in the moonroof.
WARNING
∙ In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the
moonroof opening while the vehicle is in
motion or while the moonroof is closing.
CAUTION
∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
∙ Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area.
LIC2228
Panoramic sunshade
The panoramic sunshade operates when the
ignition switch is in the ON position. The
sunshade switch is located near the roof console. When opening or closing the sunshade
the switch need not be held.
To open the sunshade:
∙ To fully open the sunshade, push the
1 toward the open position.
switch 䊊
To close the sunshade:
∙ To fully close the sunshade, push the
2 toward the close position.
switch 䊊
Instruments and controls 2-69
WARNING
∙ To avoid personal injury, keep your
hands, fingers and head away from the
sunshade arm, the arm rail and sunshade
inlet port.
∙ Do not allow children near the rear sunshade system. They could be injured.
∙ Do not place objects on or near the rear
sunshade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.
∙ Do not pull or push the rear sunshade.
This could cause improper operation or
damage it.
CAUTION
∙ Do not place objects (such as newspapers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sunshade inlet port. Doing so may entangle
these objects in the sunshade when it is
extending or retracting, causing improper operation or damage to the
sunshade.
∙ Do not push the sunshade arm with your
hands, etc., as this may deform it. Improper operation or damage to the sunshade may result.
2-70 Instruments and controls
∙ Do not put any object into the sunshade
inlet port as this may result in improper
operation or damage the sunshade.
∙ Do not hang any object on the arm rail as
this may result in improper operation or
damage the sunshade.
5. Sunshade drive cable will travel in the
open direction for .394 in. (10 mm) then
reverse direction and stop at the normal
close position.
6. Release the sunshade close switch. Initialization procedure is complete.
∙ Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. Doing so may elongate the sunshade. Improper operation or damage to the sunshade may result.
If the moonroof does not operate properly
after performing the procedure above, have
your vehicle checked. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Restarting the sunshade switch
Auto-reverse function
(when closing the sunshade)
If the sunshade does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize
the sunshade operation system.
1. Switch the vehicle ignition to the ACCESSORY or RUN mode.
2. Press and hold the sunshade close
switch.
3. Sunshade will begin moving towards the
close position only while the switch is
continually pressed. (this disables the
obstacle detection).
4. Sunshade will stop for about 4 seconds.
The auto-reverse function can be activated
when the sunshade is closed by automatic
operation when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position or for a period of time
after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the sunshade occurs.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
1 is pushed, the inteWhen the ON switch 䊊
rior lights illuminate.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all of the
passengers have their hands, etc., inside the
vehicle before closing the sunshade.
2 is pushed,
When the DOOR/OFF switch 䊊
the interior lights do not illuminate unless
individually pushed.
NOTE:
SIC4357
The interior lights will automatically turn on
and stay on for a period of time when:
∙ The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent
Key, a key or the request switch while all
doors are closed and the ignition switch is
in the OFF position.
The footwell lights and step lights illuminate
when the driver and passenger doors are
open regardless of the interior light switch
position. These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are
open to prevent the battery from becoming
discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in
a discharged battery.
∙ The doors and/or liftgate is opened.
∙ The switch is individually pushed.
Instruments and controls 2-71
LIC2213
Rear personal lights
CONSOLE LIGHT
MAP LIGHTS
The console light 䊊 will turn on whenever
the parking lights or headlights are illuminated.
To turn the map lights on, push the switches.
To turn them off, push the switches again.
1
The console light brightness can be adjusted
with the illumination brightness control in the
vehicle information display.
2-72 Instruments and controls
LIC1083
SIC4356
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in
a discharged battery.
PERSONAL LIGHTS
To turn the rear personal lights on, press the
switch. To turn them off, press the switch
again.
HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in
a discharged battery.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the
functions of up to three individual hand-held
transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
∙ Will operate most radio frequency devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and
security systems.
SIC2063A
CARGO LIGHT
The cargo light on the overhead trim has a
three-position switch. To operate, push the
switch to the desired position.
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
ON: The light is illuminated.
DOOR: The light illuminates when the
liftgate is opened. The light turns off
when the liftgate is closed.
∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of
the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver buttons should be
erased for security purposes. For additional
information, refer to “Programming
HomeLink®” in this section.
OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless of liftgate position or lock status.
Instruments and controls 2-73
WARNING
∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door opener
that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured
after April 1, 1982). A garage door
opener which cannot detect an object in
the path of a closing garage door and
then automatically stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door opener
without these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
∙ During the programming procedure your
garage door or security gate will open
and close (if the transmitter is within
range). Make sure that people or objects
are clear of the garage door, gate, etc.
that you are programming.
∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off
while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and
odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
2-74 Instruments and controls
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC position
when programming HomeLink®. It is also
recommended that a new battery be placed
in the hand-held transmitter of the device
being programmed to HomeLink® for
quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
LIC2365
1. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink® surface, keeping the
1 in view.
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊
3. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
1
is
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
solid/continuous, programming is
complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pressed and released.
LIC2366
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press
and hold the desired HomeLink® button
and hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release until the HomeLink® indi1 flashes slowly and then
cator light 䊊
rapidly. When the indicator light flashes
rapidly, both buttons may be released.
(The rapid flashing indicates successful
programming.)
NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in
“Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers” in this section.
1 blinks rapidly
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue with
Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A
second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other
device. Do not stand on your vehicle to
perform the next steps.
4. At the receiver located on the garage
door opener motor in the garage, locate
the “learn” or “smart” button (the name
and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer but it is usually located
near where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the unit). If there is difficulty
locating the button, reference the garage door opener’s manual.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press
and hold the trained HomeLink® button
for 2 seconds and release. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence up to
three times to complete the training process. HomeLink® should now activate
your rolling code equipped device.
7. If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web
site at: www.homelink.com or call
1-800-355-3515.
OPERATING THE HOMELINK®
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after
it is programmed, can be used to activate the
programmed device. To operate, simply press
and release the appropriate programmed
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button.
The amber indicator light will illuminate while
the signal is being transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter
of the device may also be used at any time.
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”
button.
Instruments and controls 2-75
PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
hand-held transmitter information:
The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,
individual buttons can be reprogrammed. For
additional information, refer to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button” in this section.
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following:
∙ replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.
∙ position the hand-held transmitter with
its battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface.
∙ press and hold both the HomeLink® and
hand-held transmitter buttons without
interruption.
∙ position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 in
(2 - 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink®
is not programmed within that time, try
holding the transmitter in another position – keeping the indicator light in view
at all times.
If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the INFINITI Consumer
Affairs Department. The phone numbers are
located in the Foreword of this manual.
2-76 Instruments and controls
To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash in approximately
10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than
20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the programming mode
and can be programmed at any time beginning with “Programming HomeLink®” Step 1.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new
device can be activated by pressing the
HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any
other programmed HomeLink® buttons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
FCC Notice:
For Canada:
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change
the codes of any non-rolling code device that
has been programmed into HomeLink®.
Consult the Owner’s Manual of each device
or call the manufacturer or dealer of those
devices for additional information.
For USA:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Instruments and controls 2-77
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
INFINITI Intelligent Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Locking with key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Locking with inside lock knob — Type A
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Locking with inside lock knob — Type B
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Locking with power door lock switch. . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
INFINITI Intelligent Key System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
INFINITI Intelligent Key operation. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . . 3-20
Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Conditions the Remote Engine Start will
not work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Operating the power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Motion-Activated Liftgate (if so
equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Power liftgate main switch (if so
equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Liftgate position setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Opening the fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Tilt and telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Sun visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Memory storage function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Setting memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
KEYS
If you lose your keys, it is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for duplicates by
using the key number. INFINITI does not record key numbers so it is very important to
keep track of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be
duplicated without knowing the key number.
CAUTION
WPD0427
Type A (if so equipped)
1.
2.
3.
Intelligent Keys (two sets)
Mechanical key
Key number plate (one plate)
INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key System components and
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System components.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2052
Type B (if so equipped)
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new
keys must be registered prior to use with the
Intelligent Key System and INFINITI Vehicle
Immobilizer System of your vehicle. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer
for this service. Since the registration process
requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent
Key components when registering new keys,
be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you
have to the INFINITI retailer.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe
place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle.
Listed below are conditions or occurrences
which will damage the Intelligent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key.
If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
CAUTION
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key slot.
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
For additional information, refer to “Doors” in
this section and “Storage” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent
Key to operate the vehicle. For information
regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.
Valet hand-off
When you have to leave a key with a valet,
give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep
the mechanical key with you to protect your
belongings.
SPA1951
Mechanical key
To prevent the glove box from being opened
during valet hand-off, follow the procedure
below.
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical
key.
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the
lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical
key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it
into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob
returns to the lock position.
3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and
keep the mechanical key with you.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors and glove box.
For additional information, refer to “Storage”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
DOORS
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to the
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
The mechanical key can be used for all the
locks.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing
key can be duplicated without knowing the
key number. As many as four INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
with one vehicle. You should bring all
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys
that you have to the INFINITI retailer for
registration. This is because the registration
process will erase the memory of all key
codes previously registered into the INFINITI
Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only
recognize keys coded into the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Any key that is not given to the retailer at the
time of registration will no longer be able to
start your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key,
which contains an electrical transponder,
to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be
opened using the inside or outside door
handles. The doors must be unlocked to open
the doors.
WARNING
∙ Before opening any door, always look for
and avoid oncoming traffic.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury and/or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door
lock activation, do not leave children,
people who require the assistance of others and/or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can
quickly become high enough to cause a
significant risk of injury or death to
people and/or pets.
LPD2129
Driver’s side
LPD2681
SPA2726
LOCKING WITH KEY
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB — TYPE A (if so equipped)
To lock the door, turn the key toward the
1 . To unlock, turn the key
front of the vehicle 䊊
2 .
toward the rear of the vehicle 䊊
To lock the door without the key, move the
1 , then close
inside lock to the lock position 䊊
the door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
2 .
inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊
Inside lock
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB — TYPE B (if so equipped)
To lock the door without the key, move the
1 , then
inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊
close the door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
2 .
inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊
For front doors, the door can also be unlocked by pulling on the inside handle lever
3 .
one time 䊊
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch is moved to
the lock position and any door is open, all
doors will lock and unlock automatically. With
the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle and any
door open, all doors will unlock automatically
and a chime will sound after the door is
closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
SPA2727
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
1 . When locking the
side) to the lock position 䊊
door this way, be certain not to leave the key
inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push
the door lock switch (driver’s or front passen2 .
ger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
∙ All doors unlock automatically when the
transmission is placed in the P (Park) position or when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The automatic door unlock function can be
changed using “Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
LPD2374
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR
LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially
when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the LOCK position, the
door can be opened only from the outside.
INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric
medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical
equipment manufacturer for the possible
influences before use.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door locks using the remote control function
or pushing the request switch on the vehicle
without taking the key out from a pocket or
purse. The operating environment and/or
conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.
CAUTION
interfere with the operation of the Intelligent
Key system under the following operating
conditions:
∙ When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such
as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.
∙ When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver or a CB radio.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact
with or covered by metallic materials.
∙ When any type of radio wave remote
control is used nearby.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal
computer.
∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
∙ When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function
or use the mechanical key.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating
with the vehicle as it receives radio waves.
The Intelligent Key system transmits weak
radio waves. Environmental conditions may
Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is approximately two years. If the
battery is discharged, replace it with a new
one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an
indicator illuminates in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near
equipment which transmits strong radio
waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become
shorter.
For additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.
For models with a steering wheel lock
mechanism: Because the steering wheel is
locked electrically, unlocking the steering
wheel with the ignition switch in the LOCK
position is impossible when the vehicle battery is completely discharged. Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences
which will damage the Intelligent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent
Key to operate the vehicle. For information
regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key.
If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F).
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2054
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
1 .
operating range from the request switch 䊊
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent
Key operating range becomes narrower, and
the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left inside the vehicle, make sure you
carry the Intelligent Key with you and
then lock the doors.
∙ Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The
door will be unlocked but will not open.
Release the door handle once and pull it
again to open the door.
The operating range is within 80 cm (31.5 in)
1 .
from each request switch 䊊
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even
someone who does not carry the Intelligent
Key, to push the request switch to
lock/unlock the doors.
LPD2554
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
∙ Do not push the door handle request
switch with the Intelligent Key held in
your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the
Intelligent Key system to have difficulty
recognizing that the Intelligent Key is
outside the vehicle.
∙ After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
LPD2663
INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket
or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,
you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing
the door handle request switch within the
range of operation.
LPD2744
Locking doors — Type A
(if so equipped)
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the
LOCK position and make sure you carry
the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push any door handle request switch
while carrying the Intelligent Key with
you.
4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice
and the outside chime sounds once.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2059
NOTE:
∙ Request switches for all doors and liftgate can be deactivated when the I-Key
Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in
the vehicle settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
∙ Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while the ignition switch is not in
the LOCK position.
∙ Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the mechanical key even if any door is open.
∙ Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key
inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to
warn you. However, when an Intelligent
Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be
locked with another Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
∙ After locking the doors using the request
switch, make sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the
door handles or the rear liftgate opener
switch.
∙ When locking the doors using the request
switch, make sure to have the Intelligent
Key in your possession before operating
the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.
∙ The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
LPD2744
Locking doors — Type B
(if so equipped)
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the
LOCK position and make sure you carry
the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close the driver’s door and press the
driver’s door request switch OR close all
doors and press any door request switch
while carrying the Intelligent Key with
you.
3. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.
LPD2059
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice
and the outside chime sounds once.
NOTE:
∙ Request switches for all doors and liftgate can be deactivated when the I-Key
Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in
the vehicle settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
∙ Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while the ignition switch is not in
the LOCK position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
∙ Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while the driver’s
door is open. However, doors lock with
the mechanical key even if any door is
open.
Lockout protection
∙ Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key
inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to
warn you. However, when an Intelligent
Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be
locked with another Intelligent Key.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the
door buzzer sounds.
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key system.
NOTE:
CAUTION
∙ After locking the doors using the request
switch, make sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the
door handles or the rear liftgate opener
switch.
∙ When locking the doors using the request
switch, make sure to have the Intelligent
Key in your possession before operating
the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.
∙ The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent
Key is in the same hand that is operating the
request switch to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other
hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on top
of the instrument panel.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside
the glove box or a storage bin.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside
the door pockets.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside
or near metallic materials.
All doors will be locked automatically unless
one of the following operations is performed
within 1 minute after pushing the request
switch.
∙ Opening any door.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light timer illuminates for a period
of time when a door is unlocked and the room
light switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior light can be turned off without
waiting by performing one of the following
operations:
LPD2744
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch.
3. The hazard indicator lights flash once
and the vehicle chimes once.
4. Push the door handle request switch
again within 1 minute to unlock all doors.
For power liftgate opening:
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the power liftgate request switch.
LPD2059
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
Request switches for all doors and liftgate
can be deactivated when the I-Key Door
Lock setting is switched to OFF in the vehicle settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
∙ Locking the doors with the remote control.
NOTE:
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position
will unlock the door. If the door does not
unlock after returning the door handle, push
the door handle request switch to unlock the
door.
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.
∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the
OFF position in vehicle settings of the
vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent
Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door
handles.
The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless
function of the Intelligent Key. The remote
keyless function can operate at a distance of
10 m (33 ft) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions
around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not
function under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
∙ When the doors or the rear liftgate are
open or not closed securely.
∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
LPD2257
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
2. Close all doors.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the
vehicle.
3. Press the
gent Key.
button on the Intelli-
4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
All doors will be locked automatically unless
one of the following operations is performed
butwithin 1 minute after pressing the
ton:
∙ Opening any doors.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the room
light switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following operations:
Opening windows
The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic operation.
∙ To open the windows, press the
button on the Intelligent Key for longer
than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.
The door windows will open while pressing
button on the Intelligent Key.
the
The door windows cannot be closed by using
the Intelligent Key.
LPD2258
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
Linking the key fob to automatic
drive positioner memory
1. Press the
button on the Intelligent
Key.
2. The hazard indicator lights flash once.
∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent
Key.
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive
positioner, the key fob can be linked to a
memory setting.
Unlocking doors
button again within
3. Press the
5 seconds to unlock all doors.
NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be changed in
“Selective Door Unlock” in “Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle information display. For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.
∙ Switching the “Auto Room Lamp” to the
OFF position in “Vehicle Settings” of the
vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
∙ The request switch on the driver or passenger door is pushed and the Intelligent
Key is in range of the door handle.
WPD0414
WPD0415
Releasing the rear liftgate
Using the panic alarm
The rear liftgate can be opened and closed by
performing the following:
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call
attention by pressing and holding the
button on the Intelligent Key for longer than
0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.
button for longer than
∙ Press the
0.5 seconds to open the rear liftgate.
button again for longer
∙ Press the
than 0.5 seconds to close the rear liftgate.
button is pressed during the
When the
open or close process, the liftgate motors will
button is pressed again
stop. When the
for longer than 0.5 seconds, the liftgate will
reverse direction.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time, or
∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent
Key.
LPD2259
Answer back horn feature
If desired, the answer back horn feature can
be deactivated using the Intelligent Key.
butWhen it is deactivated and the
ton is pressed, the hazard indicator lights
button is
flash twice. When the
pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights
nor the horn operates.
NOTE:
WARNING SIGNALS
If you change the answer back horn and light
flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the
vehicle information display screen will show
the current mode after the ignition switch
has been cycled from the OFF to the ON
position. The vehicle information display
screen can also be used to change the answer
back horn mode.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle
from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds
from inside and outside the vehicle and a
warning is displayed in the instrument panel.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard indicator lights will flash three
times to confirm that the answer back horn
feature has been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds once
more.
The hazard indicator lights will flash once and
the horn will sound once to confirm that the
horn beep feature has been reactivated.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and
the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, refer to “Troubleshooting guide” in this section and “Vehicle
information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that
are programmed for the vehicle. If another
Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle,
the vehicle system may respond differently
than expected.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not
silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
When stopping the engine
The Shift to Park warning appears on
the display and the inside warning chime
sounds continuously.
The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
position.
When shifting the shift lever to the
P (Park) position
The Push ignition to OFF warning
appears in the display.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When opening the driver’s door to get
out of the vehicle
The Door Open warning appears on the
display and the inside warning chime
sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The No Key Detected warning appears
on the display, the outside chime sounds
three times and the inside warning
chime sounds for approximately
3 seconds.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The Rear Door Alert warning message
appears on the display, the horn sounds
three times twice, or a Check Back Seat
For All Articles warning appears on the
display.
The rear door alert is activated.
Check the back seat for all articles,
press the ENTER button to clear the
Rear Door Alert warning message.
The Shift to Park warning appears on
the display and the outside chime
sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position and the shift lever is not in the
P (Park) position.
Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position and place the ignition switch
in the OFF position.
The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all the doors
unlock.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When closing the door after getting out
of the vehicle
When closing the door with the inside
lock knob turned to LOCK
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
Symptom
When pushing the door handle request
switch or the
button on the
Intelligent Key to lock the door
When pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine
When pushing the ignition switch
Possible Cause
Remedy
The outside chime sounds for
approximately 2 seconds.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key battery indicator
appears on the display.
The battery charge is low.
Replace the battery with a new one. For
additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
The No Key Detected warning appears
on the display, the outside chime sounds
three times and the inside warning
chime sounds for approximately
3 seconds.
The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key system warning light
in the meter illuminates in yellow.
It warns of a malfunction with the
Intelligent Key system.
It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
REMOTE ENGINE START
(if so equipped)
Other conditions may affect the function of
the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, refer to “Conditions the
Remote Engine Start will not work” in this
section.
Other conditions can affect the performance
of the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, refer to “INFINITI Intelligent Key System” in this section.
REMOTE ENGINE START
OPERATING RANGE
LPD2272
The
button will be on the INFINITI Intelligent Key if the vehicle has Remote Engine
Start. This feature allows the engine to start
from outside the vehicle.
The following features may be affected
when Remote Engine Start is used:
∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate control system will default to either a heating
or cooling mode depending on the outside temperature.
Laws in some local communities may restrict
the use of remote starters. For example,
some laws require a person using Remote
Engine Start to have the vehicle in view.
Check local regulations for any requirements.
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The Remote Engine Start function can only
be used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range from the vehicle.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave sources
are present near the operating location, the
Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The Remote Engine Start operating range is
approximately 60 m (197 ft) from the vehicle.
REMOTE STARTING THE
VEHICLE
To use the Remote Engine Start feature to
start the engine perform the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press the
doors.
button to lock all
3. Within 5 seconds press and hold
button until the turn signal
the
lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If
the vehicle is not within view press and
button for at least 2 sechold the
onds.
The following events will occur when the engine starts:
∙ The parking lights will turn on and remain
on as long as the engine is running.
∙ The doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
∙ The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend
the time for an additional 10 minutes. For
additional information, refer to “Extending engine run time” in this section.
Depress and hold the brake then push the
push-button ignition switch to the ON position before driving. For additional information, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The Remote Engine Start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps
listed in “Remote starting the vehicle” in this
section. Run time will be calculated as follows:
∙ The first 10 minute run time will start
when the Remote Engine Start function
is performed.
∙ The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the Remote Engine Start
function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running for
5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the
engine will run for a total of 15 minutes.
∙ Extending engine run time will bring you
to the two Remote Engine Start limit.
A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, or
a single start with an extension, are allowed
between ignition cycles.
The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON
position and then back to the OFF position
before the Remote Engine Start procedure
can be used again.
CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE
START
To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform
one of the following:
∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and
until the parking lights turn
press
off.
∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
∙ Cycle the ignition switch ON and then
OFF.
∙ The extended engine run time has expired.
∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired.
∙ The engine hood has been opened.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of park.
∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into
the vehicle.
∙ The ignition switch is pushed without an
Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
∙ The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the brake
pedal is not depressed.
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE
ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK
The Remote Engine Start will not operate if
any of the following conditions are present:
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
∙ The hood is not securely closed.
∙ The hazard indicator lights are on.
∙ The engine is still running. The engine
must be completely stopped. Wait at
least 6 seconds if the engine goes from
running to off. This is not applicable when
extending engine run time.
button is not pressed and held
∙ The
for at least 2 seconds.
button is not pressed and held
∙ The
within 5 seconds of pressing the
button.
∙ The brake is pressed.
∙ The doors are not closed and locked.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
HOOD
∙ The liftgate is open.
∙ The I–Key indicator message is displayed
in the vehicle information display.
∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into
the vehicle.
∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single
Remote Engine Start with an extension,
have already been used.
∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park).
∙ There is a detected registered key already
inside of the vehicle.
∙ The Remote Engine Start function has
been switched to the OFF position in
vehicle settings of the vehicle information
display. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
The Remote Engine Start function may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
1 lo1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊
cated below the driver side instrument
panel. The hood will spring up slightly.
2 at the front of the
2. Push the lever 䊊
hood to the side as illustrated with your
fingertips and raise the hood.
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and
make sure it locks into place.
LPD2061
WARNING
∙ Make sure the hood is completely closed
and latched before driving. Failure to do
so could cause the hood to fly open and
result in an accident.
∙ If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
LIFTGATE
WARNING
∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.
∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to
be drawn into the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door
lock activation, do not leave children,
people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Additionally, the temperature inside a
closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly
become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and
pets.
∙ Always be sure that hands and feet are
clear of the door frame to avoid injury
while closing the liftgate.
OPERATING THE POWER
LIFTGATE
WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the liftgate.
∙ Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could
become involved in serious accidents.
LPD2212
Instrument panel switch
NOTE:
To open, close or reverse the power liftgate,
the shift lever must be in P (Park). Also, the
power liftgate will not operate if battery
voltage is low.
Power Open:
The power liftgate automatically moves from
the fully closed position to the fully open
position in approximately 5 – 8 seconds. The
power open feature can be activated by the
button on the Intelligent Key, the instrument
panel switch or the liftgate opener switch. A
chime sounds to indicate the power open
sequence has been started.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
A can only be
∙ The switch on the liftgate 䊊
used to open the liftgate if the power
liftgate main switch on the instrument
panel (if so equipped) is in the ON position. For additional information, refer to
“Power liftgate main switch” in this section.
A warning chime will sound if the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park) during a power open
operation.
LPD2666
Liftgate opener switch
∙ When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate
can be opened by the instrument panel
switch, Intelligent Key or liftgate opener
A (with the Intelligent Key in liftswitch 䊊
gate range). The liftgate will individually
unlock and open. Once the liftgate is
closed, the vehicle will remain in the unlock status.
∙ The Intelligent Key button must be held
for 0.5 seconds before the liftgate opens.
∙ The liftgate must be unlocked to open it
A and
with the liftgate opener switch 䊊
without Intelligent Key in liftgate range.
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2722
Liftgate close switch
Power Close:
The power liftgate automatically moves from
the fully open position to the secondary position. When the liftgate reaches the secondary position, the cinching motor engages and
pulls the liftgate to its primary latch position.
Power close takes approximately 7 – 10 seconds. The power close feature can be activated by the button on the Intelligent Key, the
instrument panel switch or the liftgate switch
B on the liftgate. A chime sounds to indicate
䊊
the power close sequence has been started.
A is acti∙ If the liftgate opener switch 䊊
vated while the cinching motor is engaged, the cinching motor will disengage
and release the latch.
∙ The Intelligent Key button must be held
for 0.5 seconds before the liftgate closes.
B can only be
∙ The switch on the liftgate 䊊
used to close the liftgate if the power
liftgate main switch (if so equipped) is in
the ON position.
Stop - Reverse:
During the open/close movement, the liftgate can be stopped if the Intelligent Key,
A or 䊊
B)
instrument panel or liftgate switch (䊊
is pressed. The liftgate can be reversed if the
Intelligent Key, instrument panel or liftgate
A or 䊊
B ) is pressed again.
switch (䊊
Auto Reverse:
If an obstacle is detected during power open
or power close, a warning chime will sound
and the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full open or full close position. If a
second obstacle is detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the liftgate will enter
manual mode.
A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the
liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch
strip during power close, the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full open
position.
NOTE:
If the pinch strip is damaged or removed, the
power close function will not operate.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the
vehicle before closing the liftgate.
LPD2666
Manual Mode:
If power operation is not available, the liftgate may be operated manually. Power operation may not be available if the power
liftgate main switch (if so equipped) is in the
ON position, if multiple obstacles have been
detected in a single power cycle, or if battery
voltage is low.
A is pushed
If the liftgate opener switch 䊊
during power open or close, the power operation will be canceled and the liftgate can
be operated manually.
To open the liftgate manually, push the liftA and lift the liftgate.
gate opener switch 䊊
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
To close, lower and push the liftgate down
securely.
LPD2484
LPD2513
MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE
(if so equipped)
The liftgate can be opened/closed using a
foot kicking motion when it is locked or unlocked. Two sensors along the rear bumper
(center area) can detect a forward kicking
B . The Intelligent Key must be presmotion 䊊
ent within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate to allow
using the motion-activated feature to
open/close the liftgate.
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Example of a proper kick
NOTE:
To achieve proper motion activation, kick
A 2 ft (60 cm). Imwithin the kicking zone 䊊
C or
proper kicking either from side to side 䊊
D will not open/close the liftgate.
at angles 䊊
CAUTION
Before performing the kicking motion,
steady your stance to prevent any loss of
balance. Also, while making the kicking motion, take caution around hot exhaust system parts. Otherwise, there may be danger
of injury.
CAUTION
Interference or malfunction can be caused
by parking in close proximity to radio or
satellite towers.
LPD2485
Proper kicking zone and method
While positioned at the rear of the vehicle
(center) at arms’ length distance away, begin
making the forward kicking motion. Kick the
foot under the rear bumper then immediately
return the foot back to standing position. The
kicking motion should be straight, smooth
and consistent. Your leg does not need to
touch the bumper surface but be within
3/4 inch (2 cm) to 4 inches (10 cm) of the
bumper surface. After your kick motion is
completed step back to allow the liftgate to
open/close. The liftgate should begin moving
within 1–2 seconds after the kick. This time is
needed to verify the Intelligent Key and to
validate the kick motion. Kicking again within
LPD2486
Improper kicking methods
this time frame (1–2 seconds) could cause the
liftgate to reverse or stop.
WARNING
Prevent unintentional liftgate opening/
closing. There may be conditions when
opening/closing the liftgate is not desired.
Keep the Intelligent Key out of the range of
the liftgate (3 ft or 1 m), when washing or
working around the back of the vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
Power operation is available when in the
OFF position by the key fob button.
Motion-Activated Liftgate (if so equipped)
will not function when the power liftgate
main switch is pushed in the OFF position.
LIFTGATE RELEASE
WARNING
∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.
LPD2277
POWER LIFTGATE MAIN
SWITCH (if so equipped)
The power liftgate operation can be turned
on or off by the power liftgate main switch on
the instrument panel.
When the power liftgate main switch is
pushed to the OFF position, the power operation is not available by the power liftgate
switch on the liftgate and liftgate opener
switch.
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to
be drawn into the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
∙ To avoid personal injury, do not attempt
to activate the power liftgate if one or
both of the liftgate struts are removed.
CAUTION
∙ If the power liftgate does not stay open
or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at
any time while a continuous warning
chime sounds, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss in one
or both of the liftgate struts. It is recommended that you have the liftgate inspected. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ Do not activate the power liftgate if one
or both of the liftgate struts are removed. Damage to the liftgate or power
liftgate mechanisms may occur.
∙ Keep the power liftgate main switch (if so
equipped) in the OFF position when
washing or working around the back of
the vehicle (with Intelligent Key) to prevent inadvertent opening/closing.
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING
The liftgate can be set to open to a specific
height by performing the following:
1. Open the liftgate using the request
switch or the Intelligent Key.
2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired position and hold the liftgate (the liftgate
will have some resistance when being
manually adjusted).
SPA2778
Power liftgate release
If the liftgate cannot be opened with the
instrument panel switch, liftgate opener
switch or key fob due to a discharged battery,
follow these steps:
3. While holding the liftgate in position,
push and hold the liftgate switch
located on the liftgate for approximately
5 seconds or until three beeps are heard.
The liftgate will open to the selected position
setting. To change the position of the liftgate,
repeat Steps 1-3 for setting the position of
the liftgate.
WPD0454
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER
DOOR
The fuel-filler door automatically unlocks
when the driver’s door is unlocked.
A on the inside of the
1. Remove the cover 䊊
liftgate.
1. Unlock the fuel-filler door using one of
the following operations:
B as illustrated to open
2. Move the lever 䊊
the liftgate.
∙ Unlock the driver’s door with the key
fob.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer as soon as possible for repair.
∙ Push the power door lock switch to
the unlock position.
∙ Push the door handle request switch
(with the key fob in range).
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
2. To open the fuel-filler door, push the
right side of the fuel-filler door to release.
To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and
lock the doors.
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions.
You could be burned or seriously injured if
it is misused or mishandled. Always stop
the engine and do not smoke or allow
open flames or sparks near the vehicle
when refueling.
∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
∙ Use only an original equipment type fuelfiller cap as a replacement. It has a built-in
safety valve needed for proper operation of
the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious
malfunction and possible injury. It could
Malfunction Indicator
also cause the
Light (MIL) to come on.
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in the
vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can
cause an explosion of flammable liquid,
vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To
reduce the risk of serious injury or death
when filling portable fuel containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact with
the container while you are filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush
it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
∙ Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube, then tighten until the
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten
the fuel-filler cap properly may cause
Malfunction Indicator Light
the
(MIL) to illuminate. If the
light illuminates because the fuel-filler cap is
loose or missing, tighten or install the cap
and continue to drive the vehicle.
light should turn off after a
The
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips, have
the vehicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
STEERING WHEEL
WARNING
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
LPD0482
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise
to remove.
1
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊
while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until
clicks are heard.
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for proper
steering operation and comfort. The
driver’s air bag inflates with great force.
If you are unrestrained, leaning forward,
sitting sideways or out of position in any
way, you are at greater risk of injury or
death in a crash. You may also receive
serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if
you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as
far away as practical from the steering
wheel. Always use the seat belts.
LPD2410
TILT AND TELESCOPIC
OPERATION
1
To adjust the steering wheel move the switch 䊊
in the following directions:
∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
2 to the desired tilt position.
direction 䊊
∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or
3 to the desired
backward in direction 䊊
telescopic position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
SUN VISORS
CAUTION
For vehicles with automatic drive positioner: Failure to reset the tilt and telescoping functions of the steering wheel, after
the vehicle’s battery has been discharged,
may prevent the steering wheel position
from being adjusted.
For vehicles with automatic drive positioner:
Both the tilt and telescopic steering operation must be reset after the vehicle’s battery
has been discharged in order to prevent the
tilt and telescopic operation from locking in
one position. When the battery has been recharged or replaced, perform the following:
Entry/Exit function
The automatic drive positioner system will
make the steering wheel move up automatically when the driver’s door is opened and the
ignition switch is in the LOCK position. This
lets the driver get into and out of the seat
more easily. The steering wheel moves back
into position when the driver’s door is closed
and the ignition switch is pushed.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.
1 so
∙ For tilt operation: Adjust the switch 䊊
the steering wheel moves to the highest
2 that can be reached.
position 䊊
∙ For telescopic operation: Adjust the
1 so the steering wheel moves to
switch 䊊
the most forward and backward position
3 that can be reached.
䊊
WPD0435
Performing these operations resets the range
of the steering wheel’s tilt and telescopic
function.
1. To block glare from the front, swing
1 .
down the sun visor 䊊
2. To block glare from the side, remove the
sun visor from the center mount and
2 .
swing the visor to the side 䊊
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
MIRRORS
3 sun visor in or out
3. Slide the extension 䊊
as needed.
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during nighttime conditions
and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
CAUTION
∙ Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position.
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor forcibly downward.
2 will illuminate when the
The indicator light 䊊
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
NOTE:
LPD2738
VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. The
vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror
cover is open.
1
Do not hang any objects over the sensors 䊊
or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing
so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors,
resulting in improper operation.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33
For additional information on HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver operation, refer to the
“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
LPD2418
Type A (if so equipped)
LPD0469
Type B (if so equipped)
Type A (if so equipped)
Type B (if so equipped)
The automatic anti-glare feature is activated
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
With the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, press the buttons as described:
∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
the O button. The indicator light will
turn off.
∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, press
the | button. The indicator light will
turn on.
3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WARNING
∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
LPD2269
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position.
Move the small switch 䊊 to select the left or
right mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired
2 . Move the
position using the large switch 䊊
1 to the center (neutral) position to
switch 䊊
prevent accidentally moving the mirror.
1
LPD2303
Power folding outside mirrors
CAUTION
∙ Do not touch the mirrors while they are
moving. Your hand may be pinched, and
the mirror may malfunction.
∙ Do not drive with the mirrors stored. You
will be unable to see behind the vehicle.
2 to open or the switch 䊊
1
Push the switch 䊊
to close the mirrors.
If one of the mirrors are manually operated or
bumped, the mirror body can become loose
at the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35
operation, cycle the mirrors by pushing the
1 until completely closed, then push
switch 䊊
2 until the mirrors are in the open
the switch䊊
position
Reverse tilt-down feature
The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both
outside mirror surfaces downward to provide
better rear visibility close to the vehicle when
the mirror control switch is in either the L or R
position.
The mirrors automatically return to their
original position when you shift out of R (Reverse).
The outside mirror surfaces will return to
their original position when one of the following conditions has occurred:
∙ The shift lever is moved to any position
other than R (Reverse).
∙ The outside mirror control switch is set to
the neutral or center position.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
NOTE:
Heated mirrors
If the outside mirror control switch is in the
center position, the mirror surface will NOT
turn downward when the shift lever is
moved to R (Reverse).
The electric control type outside mirrors can
be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for
improved visibility. For additional information, refer to “Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.
Automatic anti-glare outside mirror
(if so equipped)
The outside mirror will automatically dim during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare
from the headlights of trailing vehicles. The
automatic anti-glare feature operates only
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
The automatic anti-glare feature will be on
when starting the vehicle. The indicator light
on the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare
feature is operating.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” in this section.
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
The automatic drive positioner system has
two features:
For additional information, refer to
“Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts
and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and “Steering wheel”
and “Outside mirrors” in this section.
∙ Memory storage function
∙ Entry/exit function
3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).
4. The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will come ON and stay
ON for approximately 5 seconds.
5. The chime will sound if the memory has
been stored.
LPD2068
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering
column, and outside mirrors can be stored in
the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.
NOTE:
If a new memory position is stored in the
same memory switch, the previous memory
position will be overwritten by the new
stored position.
1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position (the vehicle should be stopped
while setting the memory).
2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column,
and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37
Confirming memory storage
Push the SET switch.
∙ If a memory position has been stored in
the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light
for the respective switch will stay ON for
approximately 5 seconds.
Linking a key fob to a stored
memory position
Each key fob can be linked to a stored
memory position (memory switch 1 or 2) with
the following procedure.
1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory storage
function” section for storing the memory
position.
2. The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will come ON. While the
indicator light is ON for 5 seconds, press
button on the key fob. The
the
hazard lights will flash twice. The indicator light of the linked memory switch will
blink and click twice. After the indicator
light goes off, the key fob is linked to that
memory setting.
Once it is linked, when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, pressing
button on the key fob will move the
the
driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside mirrors to the linked memory switch position.
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to the previous position:
NOTE:
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or
canceled through “Vehicle Settings” in the vehicle information display by performing the
following:
If a new memory position is stored in the
linked memory switch, then the key fob will
link the new position and overwrites the previous position.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver’s
seat and automatic operation steering column will automatically move when the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the
driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat
more easily.
The driver’s seat will slide backward and the
steering column will move up:
∙ When the driver’s door is opened with the
ignition switch placed in the OFF position.
∙ When the ignition switch is changed from
ACC to OFF with the driver’s door open.
∙ When the ignition switch is changed from
ACC or ON while the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
∙ Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to
OFF.
∙ Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to
OFF.
Restarting the entry/exit function
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the stored memory positions will
be lost and some of the functions will be
restricted:
1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).
OR
2. Open and close the driver’s door more
than two times with the ignition switch
in the OFF position.
The entry/exit function should now work
properly.
3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION
The position of the following settings can be
linked to the Intelligent Key and the memorized settings can be available for each Intelligent Key.
∙ Climate control system
∙ Navigation system (if so equipped)
∙ Audio system
To use the memory function, set the climate,
navigation and audio systems to the driver’s
preferred settings. Lock the doors with the
Intelligent Key. Each Intelligent Key may be
set with the driver’s individual preferences.
When a new Intelligent Key is used, “Connection with the key has been done” will be displayed on the vehicle information display and
the memorized settings are available.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. The settings linked to the Intelligent
Key will start.
For additional information on using the Climate control system, refer to “Heater and air
conditioner (automatic)” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition
systems” section of this manual.
For additional information, refer to the
INFINITI InTouch™ Owner’s Manual or the
“Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems” section of this manual.
∙ When the seat has already been moved
to the memorized position.
∙ When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
∙ When the shift lever is moved from P
(Park) to any other position.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will
not work or will stop operating under the
following conditions:
1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked to
the memorized settings.
∙ When the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h) or 4 mph (7km/h) for some
limited functions such as linking a key fob
to the meter when the power source is
turned on from off or during the exit
function.
2. Unlock the doors by pushing the driver’s
door handle request switch or the
button on the Intelligent Key.
∙ When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating.
To engage the memorized settings, perform
the following:
∙ When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
seat and steering column is turned on
while the automatic drive positioner is
operating.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39
MEMO
3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems
Infiniti InTouchTM Owner’s Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Around View® Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Around View® Monitor system operation . . . . . .4-5
Difference between predicted and actual
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
How to park with predicted course lines. . . . . . 4-10
How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Parking guidance (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Around View® Monitor settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Adjusting the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Around View® Monitor system
limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Camera Aiding Parking Sensor (sonar). . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Sonar System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Turning ON and OFF the sonar function . . . . . 4-25
Sonar System Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Moving Object Detection (MOD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
MOD system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Turning MOD on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
CLIMATE setting screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Rear automatic air conditioning system . . . . . . 4-39
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
INFINITI INTOUCHTM
OWNER’S MANUAL
Refer to the Infiniti InTouchTM Owner’s
Manual that includes the following information.
∙ Infiniti InTouchTM Services
∙ Navigation system (if so equipped)
∙ Audio system
∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system
∙ Viewing information
∙ Other settings
∙ Voice recognition (if so equipped)
∙ General system information
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
AROUND VIEW® MONITOR
LHA3874
1. CAMERA button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the
Around View® Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The Around View® Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for
proper vehicle operation because it has
areas where objects cannot be viewed.
The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or
rear views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move
before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other
maneuvers.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the
camera.
The monitor displays various views of the
position of the vehicle in a split screen format.
Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
∙ Front View
An approximately 150–degree view of
the front of the vehicle.
∙ Rear View
An approximately 150–degree view of
the rear of the vehicle.
∙ Bird’s-Eye View
The surrounding views of the vehicle
from above.
∙ Front-Side View
The view around and ahead of the front
passenger’s side wheel.
∙ Front-Wide View
An approximately 180–degree view of
the front the vehicle.
∙ Rear-Wide View
An approximately 180–degree view of
the rear of the vehicle.
The Around View® Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations
such as slot parking or parallel parking.
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4347
To display the multiple views, the Around
View® Monitor system uses cameras located
in the front grille, on the vehicle’s outside
mirrors and one just above the vehicle’s li1 .
cense plate 䊊
AROUND VIEW® MONITOR
SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press the CAMERA button to operate
the Around View® Monitor.
When the camera is first activated with the
bird’s-eye view in the display, a red icon will
flash on the screen. This indicates that the
sonar system is activated. For additional information on the front and rear sonar system
(if so equipped), refer to “Front and rear sonar
system” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
The screen displayed on the Around View®
Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA
button has been pressed with the shift lever
in a position other than the R (Reverse) position.
Available views
WARNING
∙ The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width lines should be used as a reference
only when the vehicle is on a paved, level
surface. The apparent distance viewed
on the monitor may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle and
displayed objects.
∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-eye
view as a reference. The lines and the
bird’s-eye view are greatly affected by
the number of occupants, cargo, fuel
level, vehicle position, road condition and
road grade.
∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predicted course lines and the actual
course line.
∙ The vehicle width and predicted course
lines are wider than the actual width and
course.
∙ The displayed lines will appear slightly
off to the right, because the rearview
camera is not installed in the rear center
of the vehicle.
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines and
the bird’s-eye view may be displayed
incorrectly.
∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects
viewed in the monitor are further than
they appear. When driving the vehicle
down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor
are closer than they appear.
∙ Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed
in the monitor and outside mirrors.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
The front view will not be displayed when the
vehicle speed is above 10 km/h (6 mph).
NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front view
and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight-ahead position, both the right and left predicted course
6 are displayed. When the steering
lines 䊊
wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line
is displayed only on the opposite side of the
turn.
SAA1840
SAA1896
Front view
Front and rear view
Rear view
5 :
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
vehicle width and distance to objects with
A are disreference to the vehicle body line 䊊
played on the monitor.
Indicate the approximate vehicle width when
backing up.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
1 : approximately 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
∙ Red line 䊊
2 : approximately 1 m (3 ft)
∙ Yellow line 䊊
3 : approximately 2 m (7 ft)
∙ Green line 䊊
4 : approximately 3 m (10 ft)
∙ Green line 䊊
6 :
Predicted course lines 䊊
Indicate the predicted course when operating
the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be
displayed on the monitor when the steering
wheel is turned. The predicted course lines
will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed
while the steering wheel is in the straightahead position.
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
2 is highlighted in
The non-viewable area 䊊
yellow for several seconds after the bird’seye view is displayed. It will be shown only the
first time after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position.
∙ Tire angle display does not indicate the
actual tire angle.
The driver can check the approximate direction and angle of the tire on the display by the
3 when driving the vehicle forward
tire icon 䊊
or backward.
WARNING
∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will appear
further than the actual distance.
LHA3730
Bird’s-eye view
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view
of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle
position and the predicted course to a parking space.
1 shows the position of the
The vehicle icon 䊊
vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between objects viewed in the bird’s-eye view
may differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.
2
The areas that the cameras cannot cover 䊊
are indicated in black.
∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may
be misaligned or not displayed at the
seam of the views.
∙ Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.
∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be
misaligned when the camera position
alters.
∙ A line on the ground may be misaligned
and is not seen as being straight at the
seam of the views. The misalignment will
increase as the line proceeds away from
the vehicle.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations
on the ground are for approximate reference
only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or
projecting objects will be actually located at
distances different from those displayed in
the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to
illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and
view the objects as you are backing up, or
park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.
LHA2652
Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
width and the front end of the vehicle are
displayed on the monitor.
1 shows the front
The front-of-vehicle line 䊊
part of the vehicle.
2 shows the apThe side-of-vehicle line 䊊
proximate vehicle width including the outside
mirrors.
3 of both the front 䊊
1 and
The extensions 䊊
2 lines are shown with a green dotted
side 䊊
line.
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4216
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.
LHA4217
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
closer than it appears on the monitor.
LHA1201
Backing up near a projecting object
A do not touch
The predicted course lines 䊊
the object in the display. However, the vehicle
may hit the object if it projects over the actual
backing up course.
LHA4218
Backing up behind a projecting
object
C is shown farther than the
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the poposition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
sition 䊊
A . The vehicle may hit the object
the position 䊊
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
A if the
when backing up to the position 䊊
object projects over the actual backing up
course.
HOW TO PARK WITH
PREDICTED COURSE LINES
WARNING
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines may
be displayed incorrectly.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predicted course line and the actual
course line.
∙ If the battery is disconnected or becomes
discharged, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following
procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock to
lock while the engine is running.
LHA1197
LHA1198
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road for
more than 5 minutes.
1. Visually check that the parking space is
safe before parking your vehicle.
∙ When the steering wheel is turned with
the ignition switch in the ACC position,
the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
A when the shift lever is
on the screen 䊊
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predicted
B enter the parking space
course lines 䊊
C.
䊊
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
D parallel
the vehicle width guide lines 䊊
C while referring
to the parking space 䊊
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking
brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
press the CAMERA button or move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate
the Around View® Monitor.
The Around View® Monitor displays different
split screen views depending on the position of
the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to
switch between the available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,
the available views are:
∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen
∙ Rear-wide view
If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the
available views are:
If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position, the
only available view is front view/front-side
view split screen.
The display will switch from the Around
View® Monitor screen when:
∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position
and the vehicle speed increases above
approximately 10 km/h (6 mph).
∙ A different screen is selected.
PARKING GUIDANCE
(if so equipped)
The system is designed to guide the driver
during parking procedures, including:
∙ starting position and steering angle for
backing up.
∙ using the bird’s-eye and front/rear view.
∙ slot parking and parallel parking (with
voice guidance).
The system detects parking frame lines using
image processing and displays lines on the
monitor.
NOTICE
∙ When setting the target parking frame,
the system detects parking frame lines
through image processing and displays
the target parking frame in the center of
the parking frame lines.
∙ When there is no parking frame line or
when the parking frame lines cannot be
detected, the target parking frame is displayed in a default location in blue.
∙ When there are multiple parking frames
detected, the candidate frame is displayed in green. Touch the frame to set
the candidate frame as the target parking frame.
How to park with parking guidance
CAUTION
The parking guide is a guidance system for
parking procedures. It does not prevent
collision with obstacles. Always look out
the windows and check to be sure that it
safe to move before operating the vehicle.
∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Front view/front-side view split screen
∙ Front-wide view
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
WARNING
The parking guide may not function properly under the below operations and
environments:
– Sudden acceleration, sudden braking,
sudden turn of the steering wheel or
sudden shift of the shift lever
The parking guide terminates under the following conditions:
∙ When the vehicle speed is above 10 km/h
(6 mph).
∙ When the parking procedure is not followed according to the guide
∙ When “End” is selected
– On non-level, paved surfaces such as
hills or bumpy or stepped roads
– When the vehicle slips, such as on a
snowy road
– When tire chains are equipped
– When the image and the actual road
differ
– When vehicle is continuously moving
at an extremely low speed
– When the wheels are misaligned
When the vehicle deviates from the parking
frame while following the parking procedure,
check that the surroundings are safe and adjust the position.
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Parking guidance screen
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
Starting position frame for backing
up/position switch frame
Indicates the starting position for backing up. Starting position frame will
change color when steering wheel is
turned. Position switch frame is shown in
green.
4
䊊
5
䊊
6
䊊
Target parking frame (blue)
Indicates the target parking position.
Target predicted course lines (green)
Indicates the predicted course needed to
park into the target parking position.
7
䊊
Clearance guidelines (red)
Indicates the approximate clearance required for parking.
“End” key
Terminates the parking guidance.
“View Change” key
Toggles the left side of the screen between the bird’s-eye view, front-side
view, front-wide view and rear-wide
view.
“Replay” key
Replays the voice guidance.
8
䊊
9
䊊
10
䊊
LHA4346
Direction indicator icon
Indicates the direction of the view on the
driver’s side part of the screen.
: Rear-view is displayed.
: Front-view is displayed.
Predicted course lines (orange)
Indicates the predicted course when operating the vehicle.
“Hint” key
When this key is selected several screens
will be available to aid in the operation of
the Park Guidance System.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
LHA4330
Example of slot parking (right side)
Stop the vehicle at approximately 1 m to the
side of the target and begin the parking procedure.
1. Press the CAMERA button to display the
bird’s-eye view.
2. Select “Park Guide”.
3. Select “Backward (R)”.
LHA4331
LHA4332
4. The parking position adjustment screen
will be displayed, showing the clearance
1 and the target parkguidelines in red 䊊
2 .
ing frame in blue 䊊
6. The starting position frame for backing
1 . The
up will be displayed in green 䊊
starting position frame is displayed in the
bird’s-eye view and front view.
5. Adjust the target parking frame (blue) so
that the clearance guidelines (red) do not
overlap with obstacles and set the parking position. Use the up, down, left and
3 to move the
right keys on the screen 䊊
target parking frame (blue). Use the
clockwise and counterclockwise keys on
4 to rotate the target parkthe screen 䊊
ing frame (blue). Select “Start”.
∙ A green frame indicates the recommended position.
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ A yellow frame indicates that switching will be required.
∙ A red frame indicates that parking is
not possible.
7. While the vehicle is stationary, turn the
steering wheel until the starting position
frame turns green and then begin to
move forward into the starting position
2 .
frame 䊊
8. Keep the steering wheel in its current
position and move the vehicle slowly
forward. A chime will sound when the
vehicle fits into the frame.
LHA4333
9. Stop the vehicle and place the shift lever
in the R (Reverse) position.
LHA4334
1 and
10. Predicted course lines (orange) 䊊
2
target predicted course lines (green) 䊊
will be displayed on the screen. While the
vehicle is stationary, turn the steering
wheel until the predicted course lines
(orange) and target predicted course
lines (green) are overlapping. A chime
will sound when the two lines overlap.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
LHA4335
11. Keep the steering wheel in its current
position and move the vehicle slowly
backward toward the orange frame. A
chime will sound when the vehicle fits
into the frame. You can adjust the target
parking frame by turning the steering
wheel left or right during backing up.
12. Align the steering wheel and move the
vehicle slowly backward toward the target parking frame.
13. Stop the vehicle.
LHA4330
Example of parallel parking
(left side)
Stop the vehicle at approximately 1 m to the
side of the target parking position and begin
the parking procedure.
1. Press the CAMERA button to display the
bird’s-eye view.
2. Select “Park Guide”.
3. Select "Parallel (L)”.
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4336
4. The parking position adjustment screen
will be displayed, showing the clearance
1 and the target parkguidelines in red 䊊
2 .
ing frame in blue 䊊
5. Adjust the target parking frame (blue) so
that the clearance guidelines (red) do not
overlap with obstacles and set the parking position. Use the up, down, left and
3 to move the
right keys on the screen 䊊
target parking frame (blue). Use the
clockwise and counterclockwise keys on
4 to rotate the target parkthe screen 䊊
ing frame (blue).
6. If the target parking space is narrow,
5 . In this mode,
select “Narrow Mode”䊊
the target parking frame will turn yellow
and the space between the target parking frame and the clearance guidelines
will become narrower. In this mode,
switching will be required. Select “Start”.
8. While the vehicle is stationary, turn the
steering wheel until the starting position
frame turns green and then begin to
move forward into the starting position
2 .
frame 䊊
9. Keep the steering wheel in its current
position and move the vehicle slowly forward. A chime will sound when the vehicle fits into the frame.
LHA4337
7. The starting position frame for backing
1 . The
up will be displayed in green 䊊
starting position frame is displayed in the
bird’s-eye view.
∙ A green frame indicates the recommended position.
∙ A yellow frame indicates that switching will be required.
∙ A red frame indicates that parking is
not possible.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
LHA4338
10. Stop the vehicle and place the shift lever
in the R (Reverse) position.
LHA4339
1 and
11. Predicted course lines (orange) 䊊
2
target predicted course lines (green) 䊊
will be displayed on the screen. While the
vehicle is stationary, turn the steering
wheel until the predicted course lines (orange) and target predicted course lines
(green) are overlapping. A chime will
sound when the two lines overlap.
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4340
12. Keep the steering wheel in its current
position and move the vehicle slowly
backward toward the position switch
1 (green). A chime will sound
frame 䊊
when the vehicle fits into the orange
frame.
13. Stop the vehicle. Predicted course lines
(orange) and target predicted course
lines (green) are displayed.
LHA4341
14. When the vehicle is stationary, turn the
steering wheel until the predicted course
lines (orange) and target predicted
1 are overlapping. A
course lines (green) 䊊
chime will sound when the two lines
overlap.
15. Back the vehicle up to the target parking
2 .
frame (blue) 䊊
16. Keep the steering wheel position in its
current position and move the vehicle
slowly backward toward the blue frame.
A chime will sound when the vehicle fits
into the orange frame.
17. Stop the vehicle.
LHA4265
AROUND VIEW® MONITOR
SETTINGS
To set up the Around View® Monitor to your
preferred settings, press the SETTING button, select the “Camera/Sonar” key. For additional information about the Sonar, refer to
“Camera aiding parking sensor (sonar)” in this
section. For information about the Display
screen adjustment, refer to “Adjusting the
screen” in this section.
Predicted Course Lines:
LHA4266
Camera View Priority:
The view shown on the screen at the beginning of the Around View® Monitor operation
can be selected in order of priority.
Non-viewable Area Reminder:
With this item turned to ON, the nonviewable area is highlighted in yellow for
seven seconds after the bird’s-eye view is
displayed. It will only be shown the first time
after the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
When this item is turned to ON, the predicted
course lines are displayed in the front view,
rear view and bird’s-eye view.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
Moving Object Detection (MOD):
When this item is turned to ON, the MOD is
activated. When this item is turned to OFF
(indicator turns off), the MOD system is deactivated.
LHA4267
LHA4268
MOD Volume:
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
Adjusts the MOD volume between High, MID
or LOW by touching the “+” or “-” key on the
display screen. This feature is only available
when “Moving Object Detection” is on.
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,
Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of the
Around View® Monitor, press the SETTING
button with the monitor on and select the
“Display”, touch the Camera or Camera/
Sonar key and select one of the items and
change the value by touching the “+” or “-” key
or by turning the INFINITI controller.
Automatic Display with Sonar:
When this item is turned to ON, the camera
view is automatically shown on the display in
the case that the distance to the objects
measured by the sonar is becoming short.
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NOTE:
Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of the Around View®
Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly applied.
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
Around View® Monitor. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Do not use the Around View® Monitor
with the outside mirrors in the stored position, and make sure that the liftgate is
securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Around View® Monitor.
∙ The apparent distance between objects
viewed on the Around View® Monitor
differs from the actual distance.
∙ The cameras are installed on the front
grille, the outside mirrors and above the
rear license plate. Do not put anything on
the vehicle that covers the cameras.
LHA4348
AROUND VIEW® MONITOR
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the cameras. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water
condensation on the lens, a malfunction,
fire or an electric shock.
∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could cause
a malfunction or cause damage resulting
in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system will
not show objects and the system does not
warn of moving objects. When in the front or
rear view display, an object below the bum1 .
per or on the ground may not be viewed 䊊
When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall object near
2 of the camera viewing areas will
the seam 䊊
not appear in the monitor.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ When the temperature is extremely high
or low, the screen may not display objects
clearly.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.
∙ The colors of objects on the Around
View® Monitor may differ somewhat
from the actual color of objects.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
∙ Objects on the Around View® Monitor
may not be clear and the color of the
object may differ in a dark environment.
∙ There may be differences in sharpness
between each camera view of the bird’seye view.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe
off any wax with a clean cloth that has
been dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry
cloth.
LHA4270
System temporarily unavailable
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,
there are abnormal conditions in the Around
View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal
driving operation but the system should be
inspected. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4269
When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the
screen, the camera image may be receiving
temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal
driving operation but the system should be
inspected. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
CAMERA AIDING PARKING SENSOR
(sonar)
44
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the sonar function as
outlined in this section could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The sonar is a convenience feature. It is
not a substitute for proper parking.
∙ This function is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
LHA4347
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the cameras as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other
maneuvers.
∙ Always look around and check that it is
safe to move before parking.
∙ Read and understand the limitations of
the sonar as contained in this section.
The sonar function helps to inform the driver
of large stationary objects around the vehicle
when parking by issuing an audible and visual
alert.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the
1 , the Around View® Monitor may
cameras 䊊
not display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping
with a dry cloth.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
When the camera image is shown on the
center display, the system shows the sonar
indicator regardless of the shift lever position.
The system is deactivated at speeds above
10 km/h (6 mph). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
The colors of the sonar indicators and the
distance guide lines in the front, front-wide,
rear, and rear-wide views indicate different
distances to the object.
When the objects are detected, the indicator
(green) appears and blinks and the tone
sounds intermittently. When the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the color of the
indicator turns yellow and the rate of the
blinking and the rate of the tone increase.
When the vehicle is very close to the object,
the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and
the tone sounds continuously.
LHA4245
1. Center display
SONAR SYSTEM OPERATION
2. CAMERA button
The system gives the tone for front objects
when the shift lever is in the “D” (Drive) position and both front and rear objects when the
shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position.
3. SETTING button
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an object is detected by only the
corner sonar and the distance does not
change.
The tone will stop when the object is no
longer near the vehicle.
∙ When the ignition switch is placed in the
“OFF” position and turned back to the
“ON” position again. To prevent the sonar
system from activating altogether, use
the “Sonar” menu. For additional information, refer to “Sonar function settings”
in this section.
Sonar function settings
To set up the sonar function to your preferred
settings, press the SETTING button, select
the “Camera/Sonar” key and then select the
“Sonar” key on the center display.
LHA4272
TURNING ON AND OFF THE
SONAR FUNCTION
A is selected, the indiWhen the “
” key 䊊
B will turn off and the sonar will be
cator 䊊
turned off temporarily. The Moving Object
Detection (MOD) system will also be turned
off at the same time. For additional information, refer to “Moving Object Detection
A is
(MOD)” in this section. When the key 䊊
selected again, the indicator will turn on and
the sonar will turn back on.
LHA4273
In the below cases, the sonar will be turned
back on automatically:
∙ When the shift lever is placed in the “R”
(Reverse) position.
∙ When the CAMERA button is pressed
and a screen other than the camera view
is shown on the display.
∙ When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 10 km/h (6 mph).
Designs and items displayed on the screen
may vary depending on the models.
Sonar Volume: Adjust the volume of the
buzzer.
Sonar: When this item is turned on, the front
and rear sonar is activated. When this item is
turned off (indicator turns off), the front and
rear sonar is deactivated. The amber markers
are displayed at the corners of the vehicle
icon and the sonar icon will disappear from
” key on the Around View® Display.
the “
The next time the ignition switch is placed in
the on position, “sonar is OFF” is displayed
briefly.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
FR sensor only: When this item is turned to
“ON”, only the front sonar sensors are active.
Interrupt Display: When this item is turned to
“ON” the display screen will interrupt the current view in the display to see the surrounding
area of the vehicle.
Sonar Sensitivity: Adjust the sensitivity level
of the sonar higher (right) or lower (left).
SONAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the sonar function. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources
such as an automatic car wash, a truck’s
compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic
drill may affect the function of the system, including reduced performance or a
false activation.
∙ The system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
∙ The system may not detect the following
objects:
– Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth,
cotton, grass or wool.
– Thin objects such as rope, wire or
chain.
– Wedge-shaped objects.
∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of objects or false alarms.
CAUTION
Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.
System temporarily unavailable
When the amber markers are displayed at the
corners of the vehicle icon and the function
cannot be activated from the Camera setting
menu (the setting items are grayed out), the
sonar system may be malfunctioning.
∙ The system will not detect small objects
below the bumper, and may not detect
objects close to the bumper or on the
ground.
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
Keep the surface of the sonar sensors (located on the front and rear bumper fascia)
free from accumulations of snow, ice and
dirt. Do not scratch the surface of the sonar
sensors when cleaning. If the sensors are
covered, the accuracy of the sonar function
will be diminished.
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION
(MOD)
LHA3874
1. CAMERA button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
WARNING
MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving
Object Detection system could result in
serious injury or death.
The MOD system will turn on automatically
under the following conditions:
∙ The MOD system is not a substitute for
proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects
surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors
and rearview mirror and turn and check
the surroundings to ensure it is safe to
maneuver.
∙ When the CAMERA button is pressed to
activate the camera view on the display.
∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position.
∙ When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 10 km/h (6 mph) and the
camera screen is displayed.
∙ The system is deactivated at speeds
above 10 km/h (6 mph). It is reactivated
at lower speeds.
∙ The MOD system is not designed to detect surrounding stationary objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of
moving objects near the vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering in parking
lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects by
using image processing technology on the
image shown in the display.
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4274
Front and bird’s-eye views
The MOD system operates in the following
conditions when the camera view is displayed:
∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the vehicle is
stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird’s-eye view. The
MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the
stowed position, or if either front door is
opened.
LHA4275
Front-wide view
∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 10 km/h (6 mph), the
MOD system detects moving objects in
the front view.
∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 10 km/h (6 mph), the
MOD system detects moving objects in
the rear view. The MOD system will not
operate if the liftgate is open.
LHA4276
Rear and bird’s-eye views
The MOD system does not detect moving
objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon
is not displayed on the screen when in this
view.
When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a yellow frame will be
displayed on the view where the objects are
detected. While the MOD system continues
to detect moving objects, the yellow frame
continues to be displayed.
LHA4277
Rear and front-side views
NOTE:
While the BCI chime (if so equipped) is beeping, the MOD system does not chime.
1 is
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊
displayed on each camera image (front, rear,
right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected.
2 is displayed on each
The yellow frame 䊊
view in the front view and rear view modes.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
TURNING MOD ON AND OFF
1. Press the SETTINGbutton on the control
panel
2. Touch the Camera/Sonar key
3. Select Camera
4. Touch “Moving Object Detection” to
switch between ON and OFF.
You can also turn MOD on and off by press4 on the display screen.
” key 䊊
ing the “
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
LHA4278
Rear-wide view
3 is displayed in the view
A blue MOD icon 䊊
where the MOD system is operative. A gray
MOD icon is displayed in the view where the
MOD system is not operative.
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
3 is not displayed.
icon 䊊
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ Do not use the MOD system when towing a trailer. The system may not function
properly.
∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle window) will
interfere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ The MOD system performance will be
limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as:
– When there is low contrast between
background and the moving objects.
– When there is a blinking source of
light.
– When strong light such as another vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is present.
– When camera orientation is not in its
usual position, such as when a mirror is
folded.
– When there is dirt, water drops or
snow on the camera lens.
– When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.
∙ The MOD system might detect flowing
water droplets on the camera lens, white
smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
∙ The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, direction,
distance or shape of the moving objects.
∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the
parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone
may be altered and the MOD system may
not detect objects properly.
∙ When the temperature is extremely high
or low, the screen may not display objects
clearly. This is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
The blue MOD icon will change to orange if
one of the following has occurred:
∙ When the system is malfunctioning.
∙ When the component temperature
reaches a high level (icon will blink).
∙ When the Rear View camera has detected a blockage (icon will blink).
If the icon light continues to illuminate orange, have the MOD system checked. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
LHA4347
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the
1 , the MOD system may not opercameras 䊊
ate properly. Clean the camera by wiping
with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry
cloth.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
VENTS
4 and second
The vents underneath the first 䊊
row seats are operational when the
or
the
air flow mode is selected. These
vents cannot be closed. For additional information, refer to “Air flow control” in this section.
LHA4281
Adjust air flow direction for the center vents
1 , driver’s and passenger’s side vents 䊊
2 ,
䊊
3 and rear compartment
rear console vents 䊊
5 by moving the vent slide and/or vent
vents䊊
assemblies.
Open or close the vents using the dial (if so
to
equipped). Move the dial toward the
open the vents or toward the
to close
them.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic)
11.
Temperature control (decrease)
button (passenger’s side)
12. DUAL button
13.
Manual air flow control button
14.
Temperature control (decrease)
button (driver’s side)
15.
Temperature control (increase)
button (driver’s side)
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
LHA4250
1.
2.
Front defogger button
REAR window and outside
mirror defogger switch
3. OFF button
4.
(Fan speed) decrease button
5.
(Fan speed) increase button
6. AUTO climate control ON button
7. REAR (ON-OFF) button
8.
Air recirculation button
9. CLIMATE button
10.
Temperature control (increase)
button (passenger’s side)
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of
others alone in your vehicle. Pets should
also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the vehicle.
Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in
a closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
2. Operate the driver’s side temperature
control buttons.
NOTE:
∙ Adjust the temperature display to about
24°C (75°F) for normal operation.
∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit.
Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger
compartment. This should help reduce
odors inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified
heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the
system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution, intake air control and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on. (The indicator on the button will illuminate and
AUTO will be displayed.)
∙ As soon as possible after the windshield
is clean, press the AUTO button to return
to the automatic mode.
∙ The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, intake air control and fan speed are also controlled
automatically.
front defogger button is
∙ When the
pressed, the air conditioner will automatically
be turned on at outside temperatures above
2°C (36°F). The air recirculate mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as
the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
Remote Engine Start with
Intelligent Climate Control
(if so equipped)
Dehumidified defogging
1. Press the
front defogger button
on. (The indicator light on the button will
come on.)
2. Operate the temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature.
∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside of
fan speed
the windows, use the
control buttons to set the fan speed to
maximum.
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Vehicles equipped with automatic climate
controls and Remote Engine Start function
may go into automatic heating or cooling
mode when Remote Engine Start is activated
depending on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the climate control
display and buttons will be inoperable until
the ignition switch is turned on. In Remote
Engine Start defogging mode, the rear window defogger and heated steering wheel (if
so equipped) may be activated automatically.
Voice Recognition logic
(if so equipped)
When the climate control system is on, the
front and rear fan speeds may be automatically lowered so that commands are more
easily recognized. Fan speed can be adjusted
using the fan speed decrease and increase
buttons, if desired.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
fan speed control buttons to
Press the
manually control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.
Temperature control
Press the temperature control buttons up or
down to set the desired temperature.
Air recirculation
Press the
air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
indicator light on the button will
The
come on.
The air recirculation cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the
front
defogging mode.
When the outside temperature exceeds 21°C
(70°F), the air conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically
to reduce overall power consumption. To exit
air recirculation mode, select the fresh air
intake button to enter fresh air mode.
Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
controlled automatically. To manually control
air recirculation
the intake air, press the
button. To return to the automatic control
air recirculamode, press and hold the
tion button for about 2 seconds. The indicator light will flash twice, and then the intake
air will be controlled automatically.
—
Air flows from defogger and
foot outlets.
To turn system off
Press the OFF button.
CLIMATE button
Press the CLIMATE button on the control
panel to display the screen for front air conditioner operations.
Rear window and outside mirror
defogger switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and outside mirror defogger switch”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
Air flow control
Press the
button to manually control
air flow. Pressing the button repeatedly will
cycle through the available modes and display the corresponding icon on the center
display:
—
—
—
Air flows from center and side
vents.
Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
∙ When the climate system is in automatic
operation and the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are
low, the air flow outlet may default to
defogger mode for a maximum of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a malfunction. After the engine coolant temperature warms up, the air flow outlet will
return to foot mode and operation will
continue normally.
LHA2173
OPERATING TIPS
The sunload sensor, located on the top driver’s side of the instrument panel, helps the
system maintain a constant temperature. Do
not put anything on or around this sensor.
∙ When the outside and interior cabin temperatures are moderate to high, the intake setting may default to turn off air
recirculation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. You may notice
air flow from the foot mode, bi-level
mode, or side demist vent outlets for a
maximum of 15 seconds. This may occur
when previous climate setting was system off. This is not a malfunction. After
the initial warm air is expelled, the intake
will return to automatic control, air flow
outlet will return to previous settings, and
operation will continue normally. To exit,
press any climate control button.
∙ Keep the moonroof (if so equipped)
closed while the air conditioner is in operation.
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you
have selected and the outlets the air is
coming out do not match, select the
mode.
∙ When you change the air flow mode, you
may feel air flow from the feet vents for
just a moment. This is not a malfunction.
2. If the CLIMATE screen is displayed and
the A/C indicator is on, touch the A/C
key to turn the A/C off.
3. Press the temperature control button to
set the desired temperature.
LHA4431
CLIMATE SETTING SCREEN
Climate control settings can be changed on
the screen.
Press the CLIMATE button on the control
panel and turn the display to the Climate
mode.
Heating (A/C off)
The air conditioner does not activate in this
mode. When you need to heat only, use this
mode.
Or, you can individually set the driver and
front passenger side temperature using each
temperature control button.
1. Press the CLIMATE button.
∙ The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.
2. By touching the “DUAL” key, or when the
passenger side temperature control button or manual air control button is
pressed, the “DUAL” indicator on the
screen will illuminate.
∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature or the system
may not work properly.
3. To turn off the passenger side temperature control, touch the “DUAL” key and
the “DUAL” indicator will turn off.
∙ This procedure is not recommended if
windows fog up.
∙ The Dual control mode cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the
front defogging mode.
When the outside temperature decreases to
approximately 0°C (32°F), the A/C function
does not activate even if the “A/C” indicator
light illuminates.
Dual control mode setting
Press the DUAL button on the control panel
to activate dual climate control functions.
Advanced Climate Control System
(ACCS) (if so equipped)
The Advanced Climate Control System
(ACCS) keeps the air inside of the vehicle
clean, using the ion control and the automatic
air intake control with exhaust gas detecting
sensor.
1. Press the CLIMATE button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
.
the indication in the screen changes to
Plasmacluster® and Plasmacluster® ion are
registered trademarks of the Sharp
Corporation.
Exhaust gas/outside odor detection sensor
(if so equipped)
LHA4508
Ion control (if so equipped)
This unit generates highly concentrated Plasmacluster® ions into the air blown from the
vents and reduces odor absorbed into the
interior trim.
When the air conditioner is turned on, the
system generates Plasmacluster® ions automatically.
The amount of Plasmacluster® ions increases according to the amount of air flow.
is displayed
When the air flow is high,
on the screen and when the air flow is low,
This vehicle may be equipped with an exhaust
gas detection sensor. When the automatic
intake air control is on, the sensor detects
industry odors such as pulp or chemicals, and
exhaust gas such as gasoline or diesel. When
such odors or gas are detected, the system
automatically changes from the outside air
circulation mode to the recirculation mode.
When the intake air control button is pressed
under the following conditions, the indicator
button will illuminate and
light on the
the exhaust gas detection sensor will turn on.
∙ The air flow control is not in the front
defogger mode (the indicator light on
front defogger button is turned
the
off).
∙ The outside temperature is about 0°C
(32°F) or more.
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
When the automatic intake air control is on,
for the first 5 minutes, the recirculation mode
is selected to prevent dust, dirt and pollen
from entering the vehicle and cleans the air
inside of the vehicle with positive and negative ions that are emitted from the vent.
After the 5 minutes, the sensor detects exhaust gas and automatically alternates between the recirculation mode and outside air
circulation mode.
4. REAR (ON-OFF) button
5. CLIMATE button
(temperature) increase and decrease buttons (driver’s side)
To turn on/off the rear automatic air conditioning system with the front air conditioner
control panel, press the REAR (ON-OFF)
button.
6.
The rear automatic air conditioning system
can be adjusted with the front air conditioner
control panel when the Rear Climate screen is
displayed.
To control the rear automatic air conditioning
system with the front air conditioner control
panel, press the CLIMATE button. When the
display shows front climate control, touch
the Rear Climate key on the screen.
Automatic operation
LHA4251
Front Controls
REAR AUTOMATIC AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1. OFF button
2.
(fan speed) increase and decrease
buttons
1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator light will illuminate in the Rear Climate display.
2. Press the temperature increase and decrease buttons (driver’s side) to set the
desired temperature.
3. AUTO button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
Manual operation
∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Doing so
may cause the temperature to not be
controlled properly.
Turning the system off
∙ Temperature control
Press the temperature increase and decrease buttons (driver’s side) to set the
desired temperature.
1. Press the REAR (ON-OFF) button on
the front control panel and the indicator
light will turn off.
∙ Fan speed control
(fan speed) increase and
Press the
decrease buttons to manually control the
fan speed. Fan screen can also be controlled using the display screen. Touch
or
key to set the desired
the
fan speed.
2. Or, press the OFF button. The Rear Climate Controls will turn OFF.
Turning the system off using the display
screen
LHA4469
Rear Heating (A/C off)
1. To control the rear automatic air conditioning system with the front air conditioner control panel, press the CLIMATE
button. When the display shows front
climate control, touch the Rear Climate
key displayed on the screen.
2. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator light will illuminate in the display.
Or, using the touch-screen display,
touch the right side arrow key to display
additional keys; touch the AUTO key on
the display and the feature will activate.
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1. To control the rear automatic air conditioning system with the front air conditioner control panel, press the CLIMATE
button. When the display shows front
climate control, touch the Rear Climate
key displayed on the screen.
ON/OFF key to turn
2. Touch the
off the rear controls using the Rear Climate display screen.
This will enable the second row Rear Climate
controls.
∙ OFF button Turns rear automatic air
conditioning system off.
∙ Fan speed increase and decrease buttons Adjusts the rear fan speed up or
down.
∙ AUTO button Turns rear automatic air
conditioning system on, AUTO mode on.
∙ Temperature increase and decrease buttons Adjusts the rear temperature up or
down.
LHA2134
Rear Controls
The rear seat passengers can adjust the rear
Rear control buttons
automatic air conditioning system using the
1. OFF button
control switches at the rear of the center
console.
(fan speed increase) button
2.
The rear control buttons do not function
3. AUTO button
when the Rear Climate screen is shown on
the front display. To activate the rear control
(temperature increase) button
4.
buttons, press the CLIMATE button and the
5.
(temperature decrease) button
screen will return to Front Climate control.
6. Display
7. — (fan speed decrease) button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
ANTENNA
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
The air conditioner system in your INFINITI
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed
with the environment in mind.
The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin antenna and an antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone
in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control
system and other electronic parts.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is
required when servicing your INFINITI air
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or
lubricants will cause severe damage to your
air conditioner system. For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
CAUTION
∙ Do not place metalized film near the rear
window glass or attach any metal parts
to it. This may cause poor reception or
noise.
∙ When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage
the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe
along the antenna with a dampened soft
cloth.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for servicing your “environmentally
friendly” air conditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service
should be done only by an experienced
technician with proper equipment.
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
∙ A cellular phone should not be used for
any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.
∙ If you must make a call while your vehicle
is in motion, the hands free cellular phone
operational mode is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on the
phone, pull off the road to a safe location
and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
∙ Keep the antenna as far away as possible
from the electronic control modules.
∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 20 cm
(8 in) away from the electronic control
system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.
∙ For additional information, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for servicing.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Avoiding collision and rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Rapid air pressure loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) driving
safety precautions (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . 5-14
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
INFINITI Intelligent Key battery
discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 5-18
Driving the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
INFINITI Drive Mode Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Standard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Snow mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
ECO mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-30
LDW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
LDP system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
How to enable/disable the LDP system . . . . . . 5-35
LDP system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . 5-38
BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-41
BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI) (if so equipped) . . . 5-48
BSI system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
How to enable/disable the BSI system . . . . . . . 5-51
BSI system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
BSI driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) (if so
equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
BCI system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Turning the BCI system on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
BCI system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
System temporarily not available. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . .5-71
RCTA system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-77
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-78
ICC system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
The ICC switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Operating ICC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Operating conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
ICC system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Distance Control Assist (DCA) (if so equipped) . . . 5-99
DCA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100
How to enable/disable the DCA system. . . . . 5-103
DCA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
DCA driving situations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system (if so equipped) . . . 5-112
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Turning the FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
PFCW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
Turning the PFCW system on/off . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
PFCW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
Towing load/specification
(Gulf Standard models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Towing load/specification
(all except Gulf Standard models) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Electric trailer brake controller
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. . . . . . . . . 5-143
Active Trace Control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-144
Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Front and rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147
How to enable/disable the sonar system . . . . 5-149
Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-151
5-151
5-151
5-151
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
WARNING
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of
others alone in your vehicle. Pets should
also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the vehicle.
Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in
a closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It
can cause unconsciousness or death.
5-4 Starting and driving
∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows
fully open, and have the vehicle inspected
immediately.
∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
∙ Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
gases could be drawn into the passenger
compartment. If you must drive with one
of these open, follow these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
air recirculation button
2. Set the
to off and the fan control dial to high
to circulate the air.
∙ When a vehicle has been stopped in an
open area with its engine running for any
significant length of time, turn the ventilator on to force outside air into the
vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are
burned at high temperatures to help reduce
pollutants.
WARNING
∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust system
are very hot. Keep people, animals or
flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste
paper or rags. They may ignite and cause
a fire.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce
the three-way catalyst’s ability to help
reduce exhaust pollutants.
∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions
in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical
systems can cause overrich fuel flow into
the three-way catalyst, causing it to
overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating
conditions are detected. Have the vehicle
inspected promptly. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause the
engine to misfire, damaging the threeway catalyst.
∙ Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Additional information:
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
does not monitor the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
∙ The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 25 km/h
(16 mph). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a flat tire while driving).
Starting and driving 5-5
∙ The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the
vehicle must be driven at speeds above
25 km/h (16 mph) to activate the TPMS
and turn off the low tire pressure warning
light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check
the tire pressure.
∙ The “Tyre Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information
display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The “Tyre Pressure Low
- Add Air” warning turns off when the low
tire pressure warning light turns off.
∙ The “Tyre Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position as long as the
low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated.
∙ The “Tyre Pressure Low - Add Air” warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate
a TPMS malfunction.
5-6 Starting and driving
∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature. Do not
reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving.
Low outside temperature can lower the
temperature of the air inside the tire
which can cause a lower tire inflation
pressure. This may cause the low tire
pressure warning light to illuminate. If the
warning light illuminates, check the tire
pressure for all four tires.
∙ The Tire Placard (also referred to as the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label) is located in the driver’s door opening.
∙ You can also check the pressure of all
tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle
information display screen. The order of
the tire pressure figures displayed on the
screen corresponds with the actual order
of the tire position.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” and “Tyre Pressure
Low - Add Air” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to
a safe location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could
occur and may lead to an accident and
could result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four tires.
Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the tire placard to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section for changing a flat tire.)
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated,
the TPMS will not function and the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires
replaced and/or TPMS system reset as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire
sealant into the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CAUTION
∙ The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with tire
chains or the wheels are buried in snow.
∙ Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows.
This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and
the TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
∙ Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequencies
is being used in or near the vehicle.
∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near
the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases:
∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
and tire without TPMS.
∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID
has not been registered.
∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
INFINITI.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device
TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator
When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the
TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator provides
visual and audible signals outside the vehicle
to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
Starting and driving 5-7
Vehicle set-up:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.
Operation:
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is
reached, the horn beeps once and the
hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than
approximately 30 kPa (4 psi), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators flash
three times. To correct the pressure,
push the core of the valve stem on the
tire briefly to release pressure. When
the pressure reaches the designated
pressure, the horn beeps once.
∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds after
starting to inflate the tire, it indicates
that the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator is not operating.
5-8 Starting and driving
∙ The TPMS will not activate the TPMS
with Tire Inflation Indicator under the
following conditions:
– If there is interference from an external device or transmitter.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
∙ If the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator does not operate due to TPMS
interference, move the vehicle about
1 m (3 ft) backward or forward and try
again.
They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and offroad applications. This gives them a higher
center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An
advantage of higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at
high speeds. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt.
If the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator is
not working, use a tire pressure gauge.
For additional information, refer to “Driving
safety precautions” in this section.
– The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS
system.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or
hazard indicators.
– The identification code of the tire
pressure sensor is not registered to
the system.
– The battery of the tire pressure sensor
is low.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the
vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat
belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your
passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed
than a person properly wearing a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If
this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by
following the procedure below. Please note
that this procedure is only a general guide.
The vehicle must be driven as appropriate
based on the conditions of the vehicle, road
and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires return
to the road surface. When all tires are on
the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay
in the appropriate driving lane.
∙ If you decide that it is not safe to return
the vehicle to the road surface based
on vehicle, road or traffic conditions,
gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a
safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
pressure loss can also be caused by driving on
under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at
highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually
inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For
additional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air
pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the
procedure below. Please note that this pro-
Starting and driving 5-9
cedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the
conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
collision and result in personal injury.
∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the
direction of the flat tire.
∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
5-10 Starting and driving
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
contact a roadside emergency service to
change the tire. For additional information, refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the
“In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS
AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being
involved in an accident injuring yourself and
others. Additionally, if you are injured in an
accident, alcohol can increase the severity
of the injury.
INFINITI is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the
influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of
people are injured or killed in alcohol-related
accidents. Although the local laws vary on
what is considered to be legally intoxicated,
the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the
effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
And that is true for drugs, too (over-thecounter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t
drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
physical condition.
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your INFINITI is designed for both normal
and off-road use. However, avoid driving in
deep water or mud as your INFINITI is mainly
designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional
off-road vehicle.
Remember that 2-wheel drive models are
less capable than all-wheel drive (AWD)
models for rough road driving and extrication
when stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like.
Please observe the following precautions:
WARNING
∙ Spinning the front wheels on slippery
surfaces may cause the AWD warning
message to display and the AWD system
to automatically switch from the AWD to
the 2WD mode. This could reduce the
traction. Be especially careful when towing a trailer. (AWD models)
∙ Drive carefully when off the road and
avoid dangerous areas. Every person
who drives or rides in this vehicle should
be seated with their seat belt fastened.
This will keep you and your passengers in
position when driving over rough terrain.
∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead
drive either straight up or straight down
the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over
sideways much more easily than they can
forward or backward.
∙ Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If
you drive up them, you may stall. If you
drive down them, you may not be able to
control your speed. If you drive across
them, you may roll over.
∙ Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a
hill. At the top there could be a drop-off
or other hazard that could cause an
accident.
∙ If your engine stalls or you cannot make it
to the top of a steep hill, never attempt to
turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll
over. Always back straight down in R
(Reverse) gear and apply brakes to control your speed.
∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could
cause your brakes to overheat and fade,
resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low
gear to control your speed.
∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown around
when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be
thrown forward and cause injury to you
or your passengers.
∙ Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as
far forward and as low as possible. Do not
equip the vehicle with tires larger than
specified in this manual. This could cause
your vehicle to roll over.
∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel when driving off-road.
The steering wheel could move suddenly
and injure your hands. Instead drive with
your fingers and thumbs on the outside of
the rim.
∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure that
the driver and all passengers have their
seat belts fastened.
∙ Always drive with the floor mats in place
as the floor may become hot.
∙ Lower your speed when encountering
strong crosswinds. With a higher center
of gravity, your INFINITI is more affected
by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control.
∙ Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even with AWD
engaged.
∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground
and shift the transmission to any drive or
reverse position with the engine running.
Doing so may result in drivetrain damage
or unexpected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle damage or
personal injury.
Starting and driving 5-11
∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such
as the dynamometers used by some
states for emissions testing), or similar
equipment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure you
inform test facility personnel that your
vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is
placed on a dynamometer. Using the
wrong test equipment may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
∙ When a wheel is off the ground due to an
unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel
excessively.
∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss
of control.
∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your
INFINITI vehicle has a higher center of
gravity than a passenger car. The vehicle
is not designed for cornering at the same
speeds as passenger cars. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in
loss of control and/or a rollover accident.
5-12 Starting and driving
∙ Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted, or
radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Install tire chains on the front
wheels when driving on slippery roads
and drive carefully.
∙ Be sure to check the brakes immediately
after driving in mud or water. For additional information, refer to “Brake precautions” in this section.
∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills.
If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls
forward, backward or sideways, you
could be injured.
∙ Whenever you drive off-road through
sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel
hub, more frequent maintenance may be
required. For additional information, refer to “Periodic maintenance” in the
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance
Guide.”
INTELLIGENT ALL-WHEEL
DRIVE (AWD) DRIVING SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or
radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Install tire chains on the front
wheels when driving on slippery roads
and drive carefully.
∙ Your INFINITI is designed for both normal and off-road use. However, unlike a
conventional off-road vehicle, it is mainly
designed for leisure use. Avoid driving in
deep water, mud, and sand to prevent
tires from getting stuck.
∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground
and shift the transmission to any D
(Drive) or R (Reverse) position with the
engine running. Doing so may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such
as the dynamometers used by some
states for emissions testing), or similar
equipment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure you
inform test facility personnel that your
vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is
placed on a dynamometer. Using the
wrong test equipment may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
∙ When a wheel is off the ground due to an
unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel
excessively.
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except in an
emergency. (The engine will stop when the
ignition switch is pushed three consecutive
times in quick succession or the ignition
switch is pushed and held for more than
2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the
vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a
crash and serious injury.
LSD2014
When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch will illuminate.
Push the ignition switch center:
∙ Once to change to ACC.
∙ Two times to change to ON.
∙ Three times to return to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return
to the LOCK position when any door is either
opened or closed with the switch in the OFF
position.
Starting and driving 5-13
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to
OFF until the shift lever is moved to the P
(Park) position.
The operating range of the engine start func1 .
tion is inside of the vehicle 䊊
∙ The luggage area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key
may function.
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed
toward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel, inside the glove box,
storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent
Key may not function.
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition
switch position will change to the ON
position.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the
door or window outside the vehicle, the
Intelligent Key may function.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the
OFF position.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in the
ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the
push-button ignition switch cannot be
moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation
are displayed on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
5-14 Starting and driving
LSD2020
OPERATING RANGE
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION
SWITCH POSITIONS
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range.
LOCK (Normal parking position)
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent
Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
pushed to the ACC position while carrying
the Intelligent Key.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to
push the ignition switch to start the engine.
The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.
The ignition switch will lock when any door is
opened or closed with the ignition switched
off.
ACC (Accessories)
ON (Normal operating position)
OFF
This position activates electrical accessories,
such as the radio, when the engine is not
running.
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.
The ignition switch is in the OFF position
when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on the
ignition switch.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will
place the ignition switch in the OFF position
after a period of time under the following
conditions:
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
∙ Any door is opened.
ON has a battery saver feature that will place
the ignition switch in the OFF position, if the
vehicle is not running, after some time under
the following conditions:
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
∙ Any door is opened.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P
(Park) position.
∙ The ignition switch changes position.
∙ The ignition switch changes position.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following
procedure:
∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or
∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition
switch in ACC or ON positions when the
engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.
Starting and driving 5-15
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds
after the chime sounds. The engine will
start.
After Step 3 is performed, when the ignition
switch is pushed without depressing the
brake pedal, the ignition switch position will
change to ACC.
NOTE:
SSD0860
INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged, or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start
the engine according to the following procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will
sound.)
5-16 Starting and driving
∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC or ON position or the engine is
started by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator
appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key
battery discharge indicator, touch the
ignition switch with the Intelligent Key
again.
∙ If the Intelligent Key battery discharge
indicator appears, replace the battery as
soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will
not allow the engine to start without the use
of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using the registered
key, it may be due to interference caused by
another registered key, an automated toll
road device or automated payment device on
the key ring. Restart the engine using the
following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately
5 seconds.
3. Repeat Step 1 and 2 again.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered
key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI
recommends placing the registered key on a
separate key ring to avoid interference from
other devices.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer
fluid as frequently as possible, or at least
whenever you refuel.
∙ Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
∙ Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
∙ Check that all doors are closed.
∙ Position seat and adjust head restraints.
∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers
to do likewise.
∙ Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position. For additional information,
refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights
and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift lever is in any of the driving
positions.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and push
the ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push
and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition
switch in any position.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal
a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor)
and while holding, crank the engine.
Release the accelerator pedal when
the engine starts.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Push the ignition switch to
the ON position to start cranking the
engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop
cranking by pushing the ignition switch
to LOCK. After cranking the engine,
release the accelerator pedal. Crank
the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the
brake pedal and pushing the pushbutton ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to
run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not
start, push the ignition switch to the OFF
position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be
damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds after starting. Do not race
the engine while warming it up. Drive at
moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather. In cold
weather, keep the engine running for a
minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may
make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, place the shift lever
to the P (Park) position and push the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
Starting and driving 5-17
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (phone
chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
REMOTE ENGINE START
(if so equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine
Start require the ignition switch to be placed
in the ON position before the shift lever can
be moved from the P (Park) position. To place
the ignition switch in the ON position, follow
these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on
you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON
position.
5-18 Starting and driving
For additional information, refer to “INFINITI
Intelligent Key” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M
(Manual shift mode). Always depress the
brake pedal until shifting is completed.
Failure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed
up.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive)
position while the vehicle is reversing.
This could cause an accident or damage
the transmission.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift to
the N (Neutral) position while driving.
Coasting with the transmission in the N
(Neutral) position may cause serious
damage to the transmission.
CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to your vehicle,
when stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing
the accelerator pedal. The foot brake
should be used for this purpose.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and
smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for
this transmission are shown on the following
pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
Engine power may be automatically reduced
to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery
roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
This Continuously Variable Transmission is designed so that the foot brake
pedal must be depressed before shifting
from P (Park) to any driving position
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
the P (Park) position and into any of the
other positions if the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position while the ready light illuminates.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever to a driving position.
3. Release the parking brake and foot
brake pedal and then gradually start the
vehicle in motion.
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive) position.
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and have
an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed
up.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive)
position while the vehicle is reversing.
This could cause an accident or damage
the transmission.
CAUTION
∙ To avoid possible damage to your vehicle,
when stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake
should be used for this purpose.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift to
the N (Neutral) position while driving.
Coasting with the transmission in the N
(Neutral) position may cause serious
damage to the transmission.
Starting and driving 5-19
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is
in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle
to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property
damage.
CAUTION
Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position
only when the vehicle is completely
stopped.
LSD2358
Shifting
P (Park)
Press the button to shift
Shift without pressing the button
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal, press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever from the P (Park) position
to any of the desired shift positions.
5-20 Starting and driving
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the R
(Reverse) position only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed and the shift lever
button pressed to move the shift lever from
P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to
R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
CAUTION
Press the button while depressing the
brake pedal
R (Reverse)
To prevent transmission damage, use the P
(Park) position only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal must be depressed and the
shift lever button pressed to move the shift
lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position
to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When
parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first,
then move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.
The engine can be started in this position. You
may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled
engine while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
Manual shift mode
When the shift lever is in the manual shift
gate, the transmission is ready for the manual
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected
manually by moving the shift lever up or
down. To cancel manual shift mode, return
the shift lever to the D (Drive) position. The
transmission returns to automatic driving
mode.
When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive)
to the manual shift gate with the vehicle
stopped or while driving, the transmission
enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges
can be selected manually. In the manual shift
mode, the shift range is displayed on the
position indicator in the meter. When shifting
the shift lever to the manual shift gate, the
position indicator displays 1 (1st) up to 7 (7th)
depending on vehicle speed.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6 ⇔ 7
7 (7th)
Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.
6 (6th) and 5 (5th)
Use this position when driving up long slopes,
or for engine braking when driving down long
slopes.
4 (4th), 3 (3rd) and 2 (2nd)
Use these positions for hill climbing or engine
braking on downhill grades.
1 (1st)
Use this position when climbing steep hills
slowly or when driving slowly, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill
grades.
∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than
7th gear. This reduces fuel economy.
When shifting up
Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts
to higher range.)
When shifting down
Move the shift lever to the ⫺ (down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.)
∙ The transmission will automatically
downshift the gears. (For example, if you
select the 3rd range, the transmission will
shift down between the 3rd and 1st
gears.)
∙ Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.
When canceling the manual shift mode
∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear.
This helps maintain driving performance
and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
∙ When this situation occurs, the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator light will blink and the
chime will sound.
∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to a
higher range than selected if the engine
speed is too high. When the vehicle
speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st
gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.
∙ CVT operation is limited to automatic
drive mode when CVT fluid temperature
is extremely low even if manual shift
mode is selected. This is not a malfunction. When CVT fluid warms up, manual
mode can be selected.
∙ When the CVT fluid temperature is high,
the shift range may upshift in lower rpm
than usual. This is not a malfunction.
Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position
to return the transmission to the normal driving mode.
Starting and driving 5-21
LSD2360
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
shift lever may not be moved from the P
(Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever button pressed. To
move the shift lever, perform the following
procedure:
4. Push down the shift lock release using a
suitable tool.
High fluid temperature protection
mode
5. Press the shift lever button and move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
while holding down the shift lock release.
The vehicle may be moved to the desired
location. Replace the removed shift lock
release cover after the operation.
This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature
becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperatures with
heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer),
engine power and, under some conditions,
vehicle speed will be decreased automatically
to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the
accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle
speed may be limited.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P
(Park) position, have the Continuously Variable Transmission system checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the
P (Park) position while the engine is running
and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop
lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop
lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position.
Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
2. Apply the parking brake.
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the
transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover using a suitable tool.
5-22 Starting and driving
Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and
subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may illuminate to indicate
the fail-safe mode is activated. For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instrument and
controls” section of this manual. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition
switch in the OFF position and wait for
10 seconds. Then turn the switch back to the
ON position. The vehicle should return to its
normal operating condition. If it does not re-
PARKING BRAKE
turn to its normal operating condition, have
the transmission checked and repaired, if
necessary. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The
reduced speed may be lower than other
traffic, which could increase the chance of a
collision. Be especially careful when driving.
If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a
safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.
WARNING
∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully released
before driving. Failure to do so can cause
brake failure and lead to an accident.
∙ Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure the
parking brake is fully engaged.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to cause
a significant risk of injury or death to
people and pets.
LSD0158
To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal
and it will release.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.
Starting and driving 5-23
INFINITI DRIVE MODE SELECTOR
STANDARD MODE
ECO MODE
STANDARD MODE is recommended for
normal driving. Turn the Drive Mode Selector
switch to the center position. “STANDARD”
appears in the vehicle information display for
2 seconds.
The ECO mode adjusts the engine and transmission to enhance fuel economy.
SPORT MODE
The SPORT mode adjusts the engine and
transmission to enhance performance. Turn
the Drive Mode Selector switch to the
SPORT position. “SPORT” appears in the vehicle information display for 2 seconds.
LSD2671
Drive Mode Selector switch
Four driving modes can be selected by using
the Drive Mode Selector switch: STANDARD, SPORT, ECO and SNOW.
NOTE:
NOTE:
SNOW mode is used on snowy roads or slippery areas. When the SNOW mode is activated, engine output is controlled to avoid
wheel spin. Turn the SNOW mode off for
normal driving. Turn the Drive Mode Selector
switch to the SNOW position. “SNOW” appears in the vehicle information display for
2 seconds.
∙ When the Drive Mode Selector switch
selects a mode, the mode may not switch
quickly. This is not a malfunction.
∙ Select the STANDARD mode center for
normal driving.
5-24 Starting and driving
In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be
reduced.
SNOW MODE
NOTE:
Selecting this drive mode will not necessarily
improve fuel economy as many driving factors influence its effectiveness.
Operation
Turn the Drive Mode Selector switch to the
ECO position. “ECO” appears in the vehicle
information display for 2 seconds and the
ECO drive indicator light illuminates on the
instrument panel.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
within the range of economy drive, the ECO
drive indicator light illuminates in green.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
above the range of economy drive, the color
of the ECO drive indicator light changes to
orange. For ECO pedal system equipped
models refer to “ECO pedal system” in this
section.
The ECO drive indicator light will not illuminate in the following cases:
∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position.
∙ When the vehicle speed is below
4.8 km/h (3 mph) or over 144 km/h
(90 mph).
∙ When the Intelligent Cruise Control system (if so equipped) is operated.
ECO pedal system (if so equipped)
The ECO pedal system helps assist the driver
to improve fuel economy by increasing the
reaction force of the accelerator pedal. When
the ECO drive indicator light is blinking or
turns orange, the ECO pedal system increases the reaction force of the accelerator
pedal.
ECO drive indicator
Illuminates
(green)
Illuminates or
blinks when
When the pedal
is depressed
within range of
economy drive
Blinks
(green)
Illuminates
(orange)
When the pedal
is depressed
likely over the
range of
economy drive
When the
pedal is depressed over
the range of
economy drive
When the ECO drive indicator illuminates in
green, the accelerator reaction force is normal. When the ECO drive indicator light is
blinking or turns orange, the ECO pedal system increases the reaction force of the accelerator pedal.
When the Drive Mode Selector switch is rotated from the ECO mode to another mode
(STANDARD, SPORT or SNOW) while the
ECO pedal system is operating, the ECO
pedal system continues to operate until the
pedal is released.
If the accelerator pedal is depressed quickly,
the ECO pedal system will not increase the
reaction force of the acceleration pedal. The
ECO pedal system is not designed to prevent
the vehicle from accelerating.
Adjusting the ECO pedal system reaction
force
The ECO pedal system reaction force can be
adjusted. The reaction force setting will be
maintained until the setting is changed even if
the engine is turned off.
The ECO pedal system may not vary accelerator reaction force under the following
conditions:
∙ When the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) or R (Reverse) position.
∙ When Intelligent Cruise Control (if so
equipped) is being operated.
If the ECO pedal system malfunctions, it will
cancel automatically. The ECO pedal system
will not vary the reaction force of the accelerator pedal.
Starting and driving 5-25
LSD2672
LSD2695
Setting ECO pedal reaction force
1 button and select
1. Press the SETTING 䊊
“Drive Mode Enhancement” on the display using the INFINITI controller. Then
2 button.
press the ENTER 䊊
2 button to turn the
2. Press the ENTER 䊊
ECO pedal system on or off. When the
ECO pedal system is turned off, the accelerator will operate normally.
5-26 Starting and driving
LSD2696
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
(if so equipped)
The LDW system monitors the lane markers
1
on the traveling lane using the camera unit 䊊
located above the inside mirror. When the
camera unit detects that the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of the
traveling lane, the LDW indicator light on the
instrument panel blinks in orange and a warning chime sounds.
LSD2701
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system
could result in serious injury or death.
The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately
70 km/h (45 mph) and above, and only when
the lane markings are clearly visible on the
road.
The LDW system warns the driver with a
warning light and chime that the vehicle is
beginning to leave the driving lane.
Starting and driving 5-27
LDW SYSTEM OPERATION
The LDW system provides a lane departure
warning function when the vehicle is driven at
speeds of approximately 70 km/h (45 mph)
and above and the lane markings are clear.
When the vehicle approaches either the left
or the right side of the traveling lane, a warning chime will sound and the LDW indicator
light on the instrument panel will blink to alert
the driver.
The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.
The LDW system is not designed to warn
under the following conditions:
∙ When you operate the lane change signal
and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will
become operable again approximately
2 seconds after the lane change signal is
turned off.)
∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 70 km/h (45 mph).
∙ When the BSI activates an audible warning or when the brakes are automatically
applied by the system.
LSD2771
5-28 Starting and driving
After the above conditions have finished and
the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.
LSD2551
Starting and driving 5-29
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
LDW SYSTEM
When the LDW system is enabled in the vehicle information display, the system can be
turned off temporarily by pushing the warning systems switch. For additional information, refer to “Warning systems switch” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance”. Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER button.
3. To set the LDW system to on or off, use
buttons to navigate in the
the
menu and use the ENTER button to select or change an item:
LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the LDW system. Failure to follow the
warnings and instructions for proper use of
the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.
∙ This system is only a warning device to
inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer
the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is
the driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
∙ The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 70 km/h (45 mph) or
if it cannot detect lane markers.
∙ If the LDW system malfunctions, it will
cancel automatically, and “Malfunction:
See Owner’s Manual” will appear in the
vehicle information display. If “Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual” appears in the
vehicle information display, pull off the
road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Place shift lever to the P (Park) position and the ignition switch to the OFF
position and restart the engine. If “Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual” continues to appear in the vehicle information
display, have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime may
not be heard.
∙ Do not use the LDW system under the
following conditions as it may not function properly:
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.).
∙ Select “Lane” and press the ENTER
button.
– When driving on slippery roads, such
as on ice or snow.
– To turn on the warning, use the ENTER button to check box for “Lane”
– When driving on winding or uneven
roads.
5-30 Starting and driving
– When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
∙ On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow,
water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system
could detect these items as lane markers.)
– When driving on roads where the lane
width is too narrow.
∙ On roads where the traveling lane
merges or separates.
– When driving without normal tire
conditions (for example, tire wear, low
tire pressure, installation of spare tire,
tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
∙ When the vehicle’s traveling direction
does not align with the lane marker.
– When there is a lane closure due to
road repairs.
– When the vehicle is equipped with
non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
– When you are towing a trailer or other
vehicle.
The system may not function properly under
the following conditions:
∙ On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are
faded or not painted clearly; yellow
painted lane markers; non-standard lane
markers; or lane markers covered with
water, dirt, snow, etc.
∙ On roads where the discontinued lane
markers are still detectable.
∙ When traveling close to the vehicle in
front of you, which obstructs the lane
camera unit detection range.
∙ When rain, snow, dirt or object adheres
to the windshield in front of the lane
camera unit.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under
high temperature conditions (over approximately 40°C [104°F]) and then started, the
LDW system may be deactivated automatically, the warning systems ON indicator on
the switch will flash and the following message will appear in the vehicle information
display: “Unavailable: High Cabin Temp.”
When the interior temperature is reduced, the
LDW system will resume operating automatically and the warning systems ON indicator will stop flashing.
∙ When the headlights are not bright due to
dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not
adjusted properly.
∙ When strong light enters the lane camera
unit. (For example, the light directly
shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
∙ When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
∙ On roads where there are sharp curves.
Starting and driving 5-31
LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION
(LDP) (if so equipped)
∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as
white paper or a mirror, on the instrument
panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability
of detecting the lane markers.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around
the camera unit. Do not touch the camera
lens or remove the screw located on the
camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.
LIC3638
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the LDW system
The lane camera unit 䊊
is located behind the inside mirror. To keep
the proper operation of the LDW system and
prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the windshield clean.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the camera unit.
5-32 Starting and driving
LSD2701
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDP system
could result in serious injury or death.
The LDP system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately
70 km/h (45 mph) and above, and only when
the lane markings are clearly visible on the
road.
The LDP system warns the driver with a
warning light and chime, and helps assist the
driver to return the vehicle to the center of
the traveling lane by applying the brakes to
the left or right wheels individually (for a short
period of time).
The LDP system monitors the lane markers
1
on the traveling lane using the camera unit 䊊
located above the inside mirror. When the
camera unit detects that the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of the
traveling lane, the Lane Departure Warning
indicator light on the instrument panel blinks
in orange and a warning chime sounds. When
the LDP system is on, it will automatically
apply the brakes for a short period of time,
using the function of the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system.
LSD2790
Starting and driving 5-33
LDP SYSTEM OPERATION
The LDP system operates above approximately 70 km/h (45 mph). When the vehicle
approaches either the left or the right side of
the traveling lane, a warning chime will sound
and the LDW indicator light (orange) on the
instrument panel will blink to alert the driver.
Then, the LDP system will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time to
help assist the driver to return the vehicle to
the center of the traveling lane.
To turn on the LDP system, push the dynamic
driver assistance switch on the steering
wheel after starting the engine. The LDW
indicator light (green) on the instrument panel
will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch again to turn off the LDP system. The LDW indicator light will turn off.
LSD2549
5-34 Starting and driving
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
LDP SYSTEM
When the LDP system is enabled in the vehicle information display, the system can be
turned off temporarily by pushing the dynamic driver assistance switch on the steering wheel.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDP system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance”. Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER button.
3. To set the LDP system to on or off, use
buttons to navigate in the
the
menu and use the ENTER button to select or change an item:
∙ Select “Lane” and press the ENTER
button.
– To turn on the assistance system, use
the ENTER button to check box for
“Assistance (LDP)”
LDP SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the LDP system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the
LDW system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The LDP system will not steer the vehicle
or prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s
responsibility to stay alert, drive safely,
keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and
be in control of vehicle at all times.
∙ The LDP system is primarily intended for
use on well-developed freeways or highways. It may not detect the lane markers
in certain roads, weather or driving
conditions.
∙ The LDP system may activate if you
change lanes without first activating
your turn signal or, for example, if a construction zone directs traffic to cross an
existing lane marker. If this occurs you
may need to apply corrective steering to
complete your lane change.
∙ Because the LDP may not activate under
the road, weather, and lane marker conditions described in this section, it may
not activate every time your vehicle begins to leave its lane and you will need to
apply corrective steering.
∙ When the LDP system is operating, avoid
excessive or sudden steering maneuvers.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the
vehicle.
∙ The LDP system will not operate at
speeds below approximately 70 km/h
(45 mph) or if it cannot detect lane
markers.
∙ Do not use the LDP system under the following conditions as it may not function
properly:
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.).
– When driving on slippery roads, such
as on ice or snow.
– When driving on winding or uneven
roads.
– When there is a lane closure due to
road repairs.
Starting and driving 5-35
– When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
– When driving on roads where the lane
width is too narrow.
– When driving without normal tire
conditions (for example, tire wear, low
tire pressure, installation of spare tire,
tire chains, non-standard wheels).
– When the vehicle is equipped with
nonoriginal brake parts or suspension
parts.
– When you are towing a trailer or other
vehicle.
∙ If the LDP system malfunctions, it will
cancel automatically. The LDP system
warning light (orange) will illuminate in
the display.
∙ If LDP system warning light (orange) illuminates in the display, pull off the road to
a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn
the engine off and restart the engine. If
the LDP system warning light (orange)
continues to illuminate, have the LDP
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
5-36 Starting and driving
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime may
not be heard.
∙ When traveling close to the vehicle in
front of you, which obstructs the lane
camera unit detection range.
The LDP system may or may not operate
properly under the following conditions:
∙ When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the
windshield in front of the lane camera
unit.
∙ On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are
faded or not painted clearly; yellow
painted lane markers; non-standard lane
markers; or lane markers covered with
water, dirt, snow, etc.
∙ On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
∙ On roads where there are sharp curves.
∙ On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow,
water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDP system
could detect these items as lane
markers.)
∙ On roads where the traveling lane
merges or separates.
∙ When the vehicle’s traveling direction
does not align with the lane marker.
∙ When the headlights are not bright due
to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not
adjusted properly.
∙ When strong light enters the lane camera
unit. (For example, the light directly
shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
∙ When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
While the LDP system is operating, you may
hear a sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the LDP system is
operating properly.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
∙ When the vehicle is accelerated during
LDP system operation.
Condition A:
∙ When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
approach warning occurs.
The warning and assist functions of the LDP
system are not designed to work under the
following conditions:
∙ When the hazard warning flashers are
operated.
∙ When you operate the lane change signal
and change the traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDP system will
be deactivated for approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is
turned off.)
After the above conditions have finished and
the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDP system application of the
brakes will resume.
∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 70 km/h (45 mph).
After the above conditions have finished and
the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the warning and assist functions will
resume.
Condition B:
The assist function of the LDP system is not
designed to work under the following conditions (warning is still functional):
∙ When the brake pedal is depressed.
∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary for the vehicle to change
lanes.
∙ When driving on a curve at high speed.
Condition C:
If the following messages appear in the vehicle information display, a chime will sound
and the LDP system will be turned off automatically:
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
turn off the LDP system. Push the dynamic
driver assistance switch again to turn the
LDP system back on.
Temporary disabled status at
high temperature:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under
high temperature conditions (over approximately 40°C [104°F]) and then the LDP system is turned on, the LDP system may be
deactivated automatically. and the following
message will appear on the vehicle information display. “Unavailable: High Cabin Temp.”
When the interior temperature is reduced, the
system will resume operating automatically.
∙ “Unavailable: Road is slippery”:
When the VDC system (except Traction
Control System (TCS) function) or ABS
operates.
∙ “Unavailable: VDC OFF”:
When the VDC system is turned off.
∙ “Unavailable: Snow mode active”:
When the Drive Mode Selector switch is
turned to the SNOW mode.
Starting and driving 5-37
BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)
(if so equipped)
∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as
white paper or a mirror, on the instrument
panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability
of detecting the lane markers.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around
the camera unit. Do not touch the camera
lens or remove the screw located on the
camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.
LIC3638
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the LDP system
The lane camera unit 䊊
is located behind the inside mirror. To keep
the proper operation of the LDP system and
prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the windshield clean.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the camera unit.
5-38 Starting and driving
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The BSW system is not a replacement for
proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles
or objects. When changing lanes, always
use the side and rear mirrors and turn and
look in the direction your vehicle will
move to ensure it is safe to change lanes.
Never rely solely on the BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.
LSD2221
The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊 installed near the rear bumper to detect other
vehicles in an adjacent lane.
1
SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection
zone shown as illustrated. This detection
zone starts from the outside mirror of your
vehicle and extends approximately 3.0 m
(10 ft) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 3.0 m (10 ft) sideways.
Starting and driving 5-39
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately 32 km/h (20 mph).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the
detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica1 illuminates. If the turn signal is
tor light 䊊
then activated, the system chimes (twice) and
the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.
The BSW indicator light continues to flash
until the detected vehicle leaves the detection
zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone
after the driver activates the turn signal, then
only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes and no chime sounds. For additional
information, refer to “BSW driving situations”
in this section.
LSD2631
5-40 Starting and driving
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSW SYSTEM
When the BSW system is enabled in the vehicle information display, the system can be
turned off temporarily by pushing the warning systems switch. For additional information, refer to “Warning systems switch” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance”. Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER button.
3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER
button.
4. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER
button.
NOTE:
LSD2609
∙ When enabling/disabling the system,
the system will retain current settings
even if the engine is restarted.
Starting and driving 5-41
∙ The RCTA system (if so equipped) is integrated into the BSW system. There is
not a separate selection in the vehicle
information display for the RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled, the
RCTA system is also disabled.
∙ When the BSW system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.
BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:
– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
5-42 Starting and driving
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Vehicles remaining in the detection
zone when you accelerate from a stop.
– A vehicle merging into an adjacent
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle.
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from
behind.
∙ The radar sensors are designed to ignore
most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and
parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation
condition.
∙ The following conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes
rapidly.
– Severe weather
– A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
– Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle
– When overtaking several vehicles in a
row, the vehicles after the first vehicle
may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width.
When driving in a wider lane, the radar
sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow
lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
– Road spray
∙ Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles.
∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will
interfere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone,
the side indicator light will flash but no
chime will sound when the other vehicle
is detected.
LSD2299
Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on
Indicator off
Indicator flashing
Another vehicle approaching from
behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator
light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.
LSD2300
Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn
signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and
the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly
from behind.
Starting and driving 5-43
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone,
the side indicator light will flash but no
chime will sound when the other vehicle
is detected.
LSD2302
Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.
LSD2303
Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn
signal while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the
side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a
row, the vehicles after the first vehicle
may not be detected if they are traveling
close together.
∙ The radar sensors may not detect slower
moving vehicles if they are passed
quickly.
5-44 Starting and driving
∙ The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same
speed as your vehicle when it enters the
detection zone.
LSD2305
Illustration 5 – Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone
from either side.
LSD2308
Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn
signal while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the
side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone,
the side indicator light will flash but no
chime will sound when the other vehicle
is detected.
Starting and driving 5-45
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system
will be deactivated automatically. The “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction” warning
message will appear and the BSW/RCTA inA in the vehicle indicator (white) will blink 䊊
formation display.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog. The blocked condition
may also be caused by objects such as ice,
frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
LSD2634
5-46 Starting and driving
Malfunction
Do not attach stickers (including transparent
material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn
off automatically. The system malfunction
warning message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.
Do not strike or damage the area around the
radar sensors. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
LSD2221
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the radar
sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing
the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
Starting and driving 5-47
BLIND SPOT INTERVENTION® (BSI)
(if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSI system could
result in serious injury or death.
∙ The BSI system is not a replacement for
proper driving procedure and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles
or objects. When changing lanes, always
use the side and rear mirrors and turn and
look in the direction you will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely
solely on the BSI system.
STI0763
Radio frequency statement
∙ There is a limitation to the detection capability of the radar or the sonar. Not
every moving object or vehicle will be detected. Using the BSI system under some
road, ground, lane marker, traffic or
weather conditions could lead to improper system operation. Always rely on
your own operation to avoid accidents.
∙ The BSI system operates above approximately 60 km/h (37 mph).
The BSI system can help alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.
5-48 Starting and driving
LSD2153
1 installed
The BSI system uses a camera 䊊
behind the windshield to monitor the lane
markers of your traveling lane and radar sen2 installed near the rear bumper to
sors 䊊
detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
The BSI system operates above approximately 60 km/h (37 mph). If the system detects a vehicle in the detection zone and your
vehicle is approaching the lane marker, the
BSI system provides an audible warning
(three times), flashes the BSW indicator light
and slightly applies the brakes for a short
period of time on one side to help return the
vehicle back to the traveling lane.
SSD1030
Detection zone
The BSI system provides an audible warning
and turns on or flashes the BSW indicator
light even if the BSW system is off.
LSD2588
Starting and driving 5-49
BSI SYSTEM OPERATION
If the radar sensors detect vehicles in the
detection zone, the BSW indicator light located near the outside mirrors illuminates. If
your vehicle is approaching a lane marker, the
system chimes a sound (three times) and the
BSW indicator light flashes. Then the system
applies the brakes on one side of the vehicle
for a moment to help return the vehicle back
to the center of the lane. BSI operates regardless of turn signal usage.
NOTE:
Warning and brake control will only be activated if the BSW indicator light is already
illuminated when your vehicle approaches a
lane marker. If another vehicle comes into
the detection zone after your vehicle has
crossed a lane marker, no warning or brake
control will be activated. For additional information, refer to “BSI driving situations”
in this section. The BSI system is typically
activated earlier than the Lane Departure
Prevention (LDP) system when your vehicle
is approaching a lane marker.
5-50 Starting and driving
The BSI system turns on when the dynamic
driver assistance switch on the steering
wheel is pushed when the “Blind Spot Intervention” is enabled in the “Driver Assistance”
menu on the vehicle information display. The
BSI ON indicator light on the instrument
panel illuminates when the BSI system is
turned on.
The BSI system provides a chime and turns on
or flashes the BSW indicator light even if the
BSW system is off.
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSI SYSTEM
When the BSI system is enabled in the vehicle
information display, the system can be turned
off temporarily by pushing the dynamic driver
assistance switch on the steering wheel.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSI system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information
button to select
display. Use the
“Driver Assistance”. Then press the
ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the
ENTER button.
3. To set the BSI system to on or off, use
buttons to navigate in the
the
menu and use the ENTER button to select or change an item:
∙ Select “Blind Spot” and press the
ENTER button.
– To turn on the assistance system, use
the ENTER button to check box for
“Assistance (BSI)”
– Select “Brightness” and use the
ENTER button to toggle through the
brightness choices — “Bright/STD/Dark”
LSD2547
Starting and driving 5-51
BSI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the BSI system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSI when certain objects are present such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, or animals.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Vehicles remaining in the detection
zone when you accelerate from a stop.
For additional information, refer to
“BSI driving situations” in this section.
– A vehicle merging into an adjacent
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “BSI driving situations” in this section.
5-52 Starting and driving
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from
behind. For additional information,
refer to “BSI driving situations” in this
section.
– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes
rapidly. For additional information,
refer to “BSI driving situations” in this
section.
– A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width.
When driving in a wider lane, the radar
sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow
lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
∙ The radar sensors are designed to ignore
most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and
parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal driving condition.
∙ Severe weather or road spray conditions
may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
∙ The camera may not detect lane markers
in the following situations and the BSI
system may not operate properly.
– On roads where there are multiple
parallel lane markers; lane markers
that are faded or not painted clearly;
yellow painted lane markers; nonstandard lane markers; lane markers
covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
– On roads where discontinued lane
markers are still detectable.
– On roads where there are sharp
curves.
– On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows,
snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or
lines remaining after road repairs.
– On roads where the traveling lane
merges or separates.
– When the vehicle’s traveling direction
does not align with the lane markers.
– When traveling close to the vehicle in
front of you, which obstructs the lane
camera unit detection range.
– When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the
windshield in front of a lane camera
unit.
– When the headlights are not bright
due to dirt on the lens or if aiming is
not adjusted properly.
– When strong light enters a lane camera unit. (For example: light directly
shines on the front of the vehicle at
sunrise or sunset.)
– When a sudden change in brightness
occurs. (For example: when the vehicle
enters or exits a tunnel or under a
bridge.)
∙ Do not use the BSI system under the following conditions because the system
may not function properly.
– During bad weather (for example:
rain, fog, snow, etc.).
– When driving on slippery roads, such
as on ice or snow, etc.
– When driving on winding or uneven
roads.
– When there is a lane closure due to
road repairs.
– When driving on roads where the lane
width is too narrow.
– When driving with a tire that is not
within normal tire conditions (e.g. tire
wear, low tire pressure, installation of
spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard
wheels).
– When the vehicle is equipped with
non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
∙ Do not use the BSI systems when towing
a trailer.
∙ Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere
with the chime sound, and it may not be
heard.
SSD1026
Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind
BSI DRIVING SITUATIONS
Another vehicle approaching from
behind
Illustration 1: The Blind Spot Warning indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the
detection zone from behind in an adjacent
lane.
However, if the overtaking vehicle is traveling
much faster than your vehicle, the indicator
light may not illuminate before the detected
vehicle is beside your vehicle. Always use the
– When driving in a makeshift lane.
Starting and driving 5-53
side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the
direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is
safe to change lanes.
SSD1031
Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn
signal then the system chimes a sound (twice)
and the Blind Spot Warning indicator light
flashes.
NOTE:
If the driver activates the turn signal before
a vehicle enters the detection zone, the BSW
indicator light will flash but no chime will
sound when the other vehicle is detected.
5-54 Starting and driving
LSD2048
Illustration 3 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 3: If the BSI system is on and your
vehicle is approaching a lane marker and a
vehicle is in the detection zone, the system
chimes a sound (three times), and the BSW
indicator light flashes. Then the BSI system
slightly applies the brakes on one side to help
return the vehicle back to the center of the
driving lane.
SSD1032
Illustration 4 – Accelerate from a stop
NOTE:
Illustration 4: If you accelerate from a stop
with a vehicle in the detection zone, the
other vehicle may not be detected.
SSD1033
Illustration 5 – Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 5: The BSW indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 3 seconds.
SSD1034
Illustration 6 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn
signal while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the system chimes a sound (twice)
and the BSW indicator light flashes.
The radar sensors may not detect slower
moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.
Starting and driving 5-55
LSD2072
Illustration 7 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 7: If the BSI system is on and your
vehicle approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone the system chimes a sound (three times) and the
BSW indicator light flashes. Then, the BSI
system slightly applies the brakes on the appropriate side to help return the vehicle back
to the center of the driving lane.
5-56 Starting and driving
SSD1036
Illustration 8 – Overtaking several vehicles
NOTE:
Illustration 8: When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first
vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
LSD2050
Illustration 9 – Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 9: The BSW indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone
from either side.
NOTE:
The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle
which is traveling at about the same speed as
your vehicle when it enters the detection
zone.
SSD1038
Illustration 10 – Entering from the side
Illustration 10: If the driver activates the turn
signal while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the BSW indicator light flashes
and a chime will sound twice.
NOTE:
If the driver activates the turn signal before
a vehicle enters the detection zone, the BSW
indicator light will flash but no chime will
sound when another vehicle is detected.
SSD1094
Illustration 11 – Entering from the side
Illustration 11: If the BSI system is on and
your vehicle approaches the lane marker
while another vehicle is in the detection zone,
the BSW indicator light flashes and a chime
will sound three times. Then, the BSI system
slightly applies the brakes on the appropriate
side to help return the vehicle back to the
center of the driving lane.
Starting and driving 5-57
– When steering quickly.
– When the ICC, DCA, PFCW or FEB
with Pedestrian Detection warnings
sound.
– When the hazard warning flashers
are operated.
– When driving on a curve at a high
speed.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
LSD2051
Illustration 12 – Entering from the side
NOTE:
∙ Illustration 12: The BSI system will not
operate if your vehicle is on a lane marker
when another vehicle enters the detection zone. In this case, only the BSW system operates.
∙ BSI braking will not operate or will stop
operating and only a warning chime will
sound under the following conditions:
– When the brake pedal is depressed.
– When the vehicle is accelerated during BSI system operation.
5-58 Starting and driving
When any of the following messages appear
on the vehicle information display, a chime
will sound and the BSI system will be turned
off automatically.
∙ “Unavailable: Road is slippery”:
When the VDC system (except traction
control system function) or ABS operates.
∙ “Unavailable: VDC OFF”:
When the VDC system is turned off.
∙ “Unavailable: Snow mode active”:
When the Drive Mode Selector switch is
turned to the SNOW mode.
∙ “Unavailable: High Cabin Temp. ”:
When the camera detects that the interior temperature is high (over approximately 40°C [104°F]).
∙ “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction”:
When side radar blockage is detected.
Turn off the BSI system and turn it on again
when the above conditions no longer exist.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
When the BSI system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will sound
and the BSI system warning light (orange) will
illuminate.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning
light (orange) continues to illuminate, have
the system checked. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ The radar sensors may be blocked by
temporary ambient conditions such as
splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked
condition may also be caused by objects
such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
radar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.
∙ Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the camera
unit or radar sensors.
LSD2153
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the BSI system is
The lane camera unit 䊊
located above the inside mirror. The two ra2 for the BSI system are located
dar sensors 䊊
near the rear bumper. To keep the proper
operation of the BSI system and prevent a
system malfunction, be sure to observe the
following:
∙ Always keep the windshield and the area
near the radar sensors clean.
∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as
white paper or a mirror, on the instrument
panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability
of detecting the lane markers.
STI0763
Radio frequency statement
∙ Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on
the camera unit. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer if the camera
unit and/or area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Starting and driving 5-59
BACKUP COLLISION INTERVENTION
(BCI) (if so equipped)
∙ There is a limitation to the detection capability of the radar or the sonar. Using
the BCI systems under some road,
ground, lane marker, traffic or weather
conditions could lead to improper system
operation. Always rely on your own operation to avoid accidents.
The BCI system can help alert the driver of an
approaching vehicle or objects behind the vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.
LSD2025
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BCI system could
result in serious injury or death.
∙ The BCI system is not a replacement for
proper driving procedure, is not designed
to prevent contact with vehicles or objects and does not provide full brake
power. When backing out of a parking
space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you
will move. Never rely solely on the BCI
system.
5-60 Starting and driving
When the shift position is R (Reverse) and the
vehicle speed is less than approximately
8 km/h (5 mph), the BCI system operates.
LSD2026
1 inThe BCI system uses radar sensors 䊊
stalled on both sides near the rear bumper to
detect an approaching vehicle and sonar sensors to detect objects in the rear.
1 detect an approaching
The radar sensors 䊊
vehicle from up to approximately 15 m (49 ft)
2 detect stationary
away. The sonar sensors 䊊
objects behind the vehicle up to approxi3 .
mately 1.5 m (4.9 ft) 䊊
LSD2042
If the radar detects a vehicle approaching
from the side or the sonar detects close stationary objects behind the vehicle, the system
gives visual and audible warnings. If the driver
does not apply the brakes, the system automatically applies the brake for a moment
when the vehicle is moving backwards. After
the automatic brake application, the driver
must depress the brake pedal to maintain
brake pressure. If the driver’s foot is on the
accelerator pedal, the system pushes the accelerator upward before applying the brake.
If you continue to press the accelerator, the
system will not engage the brake.
LSD2589
Starting and driving 5-61
BCI SYSTEM OPERATION
When the shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse) position, the BCI ON appears in the
vehicle information display.
LSD2043
LSD2709
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from the side, the system chimes a sound
(single beep), the Blind Spot Warning indicator light on the side of the approaching vehicle flashes and a yellow rectangular frame
A.
appears in the display 䊊
5-62 Starting and driving
Illustration 1
NOTE:
∙ In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime
may not be sounded by the BCI system
after the first vehicle passes the sensors.
– A yellow rectangular frame appears
in the display
If an approaching vehicle or object behind the
vehicle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, a red frame will appear in the display
A and the system will chime three times.
䊊
Then, the brakes will be applied momentarily.
After the automatic brake application, the
driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.
LSD2044
Illustration 2
∙ The sonar system chime indicating there
is an object behind the vehicle has a
higher priority than the BCI chime (single
beep) indicating an approaching vehicle.
If the sonar system detects an object behind the vehicle and the BCI system detects an approaching vehicle at the same
time the following indicators are provided:
If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal,
the system moves the accelerator pedal upward before the braking is applied. However,
if you continue to accelerate, the system will
not engage the brakes.
LSD2709
The system does not operate if the object is
very close to the bumper.
– The sonar system chime sounds
– The Blind Spot Warning indicator
light on the side of the approaching
vehicle flashes and
Starting and driving 5-63
TURNING THE BCI SYSTEM
ON/OFF
The BCI system automatically turns on every
time the engine is started.
The BCI system can be turned off temporarily
by pushing the BCI switch. The BCI OFF
display appears on the vehicle information
display. When the shift lever is placed into the
R (Reverse) position again the BCI system is
turned on.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BCI system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disto select “Driver Asplay. Use the
sistance”. Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Back-up Collision Interv.”, and
press the ENTER button.
3. Select “Ignition On Status” and press
ENTER.
LSD2589
5-64 Starting and driving
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the BCI system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the
BCI system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Always check surroundings and turn to
check what is behind you before backing
up. The radar sensors detect approaching
(moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,
animals or child-operated toy vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater than approximately 24 km/h
(15 mph)
∙ The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
LSD2173
BCI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
– Illustration a: When a vehicle parked
next to you obstructs the beam of the
radar sensor.
– Illustration b: When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
– Illustration c: When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
Starting and driving 5-65
– Illustration d: When an approaching
vehicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot aisle.
– Thin objects such as rope, wire and
chain, etc.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY NOT
AVAILABLE
– Illustration e: When the angle formed
by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.
∙ The brake engagement by the BCI system
is not as effective on a slope as it is on flat
ground. When on a steep slope the system may not function properly.
If the following messages appear on the vehicle information display, a chime will sound
and the BCI system will be turned off automatically:
∙ The following conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
∙ Do not use the BCI system under the following conditions because the system
may not function properly.
– When driving with a tire that is not
within normal tire conditions (e.g. tire
wear, low tire pressure, installation of
spare tire, tire chains, non-standard
wheels).
∙ “Unavailable: High Accelerator Temp:”:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
under high temperature conditions (over
approximately 40°C [104°F]) and then
started, the BCI system may be deactivated automatically and the “Unavailable:
High Accelerator Temp” message will appear in the vehicle information display for
a period of time.
– When the vehicle is equipped with
non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
When the interior temperature is reduced, turn off the BCI system and turn it
on again.
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/dirt build up on the vehicle
∙ Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles.
∙ The sonar sensors detect stationary objects behind the vehicle. The sonar sensor
may not detect:
– Small or moving objects
– Wedge-shaped objects
– Objects close to the bumper (less than
approximately 30 cm [1 ft.])
5-66 Starting and driving
∙ Do not use the BCI system when towing a
trailer.
∙ Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere
with the chime sound, and it may not be
heard.
∙ “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction:”:
When side radar blockage is detected.
When the blockage is removed, turn off
the BCI system and turn it on again.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
Do not attach stickers (including transparent
material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
If the BCI system malfunctions, it will turn off
automatically, a chime will sound and the BCI
system warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Do not strike or damage the area around the
radar sensors. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the
engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light (orange) continues to illuminate,
have the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
Radio frequency statement
For U.A.E.
LSD2025
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 and the sonar sensors
The radar sensors 䊊
2 for the BCI system are located near the
䊊
rear bumper. Always keep the area near the
radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing
the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
Starting and driving 5-67
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
(RCTA) (if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is not
designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a
parking space, always use the side and
rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely
solely on the RCTA system.
STI0763
5-68 Starting and driving
The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to
detect other vehicles approaching from the
right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of
an approaching vehicle when the driver is
backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and
the vehicle speed is less than approximately
8 km/h (5 mph), the RCTA system is operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from either side, the system chimes (once)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching
from.
LSD2631
Starting and driving 5-69
LSD2216
1 inThe RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊
stalled on both sides near the rear bumper to
detect an approaching vehicle.
1 can detect an apThe radar sensors 䊊
proaching vehicle from up to approximately
20 m (66 ft) away.
5-70 Starting and driving
LSD2221
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
When the RCTA system is enabled in the
vehicle information display, the system can
be turned off temporarily by pushing the
warning systems switch. For additional information, refer to “Warning systems switch” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance”. Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER button.
3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER
button.
4. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER
button.
When the RCTA system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle
information display illuminates.
LSD2609
Starting and driving 5-71
NOTE:
∙ The RCTA system is integrated into the
BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display
for the RCTA system. When the BSW is
disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled.
∙ When enabling/disabling the system,
the system setting will be retained even
if the engine is restarted.
LSD2173
RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
5-72 Starting and driving
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the RCTA system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Always check surroundings and turn to
check what is behind you before backing
up. The radar sensors detect approaching
(moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,
animals or child-operated toy vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater than approximately 30 km/h
(19 mph)
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
lower than approximately 8 km/h
(5 mph)
∙ The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
– Illustration a: When a vehicle parked
next to you obstructs the beam of the
radar sensor.
– Illustration c: When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
– Illustration d: When an approaching
vehicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot aisle.
– Illustration e: When the angle formed
by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.
∙ The following conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
LSD2043
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle
∙ Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles.
Illustration 1
NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles approaching in
a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be
sounded by the RCTA system after the first
vehicle passes the sensors.
∙ Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere
with the chime sound, and it may not be
heard.
– Illustration b: When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
Starting and driving 5-73
LSD2044
Illustration 2
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system
will be deactivated automatically. The “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction” warning
message will appear and the BSW/RCTA inA in the vehicle indicator (white) will blink 䊊
formation display.
The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist.
LSD2634
5-74 Starting and driving
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing
the radar sensors.
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system will also stop working.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will
turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/RCTA
indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle
information display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
LSD2221
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the radar
sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing
the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
Starting and driving 5-75
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
Do not attach stickers (including transparent
material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the
radar sensors. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
STI0763
Radio frequency statement
SSD0941
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1. ACCEL/RES switch
2. COAST/SET switch
3. CANCEL switch
4. ON/OFF switch
∙ If the cruise control system malfunctions,
it will cancel automatically. The SET indicator in the vehicle information display
will blink to warn the driver.
5-76 Starting and driving
∙ If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the cruise control
system will be canceled automatically.
∙ If the SET indicator blinks, turn the
ON/OFF switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ The SET indicator may sometimes blink
when the ON/OFF switch is turned on
while
pushing
the
ACCEL/RES,
COAST/SET or CANCEL switch. To
properly set the cruise control system,
perform the steps below.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
∙ when it is not possible to keep the vehicle
at a set speed
∙ in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed
∙ on winding or hilly roads
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 40 - 144 km/h (25 - 89 mph) without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON/OFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator
light in the vehicle information display will
illuminate.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle
to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET
switch and release it. The SET indicator light
in the vehicle information display will illuminate. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.
∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep hills.
If this happens, drive without the cruise
control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the SET indicator light in the vehicle information display goes out.
∙ Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator
light goes out.
∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator
light in the vehicle information display go
out.
The cruise control is automatically canceled
and the SET light in the vehicle information
display goes out if:
∙ You depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST
switch. The preset speed is deleted from
memory.
∙ The vehicle slows down more than
13 km/h (8 mph) below the set speed.
∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).
∙ on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
∙ in very windy areas
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
Starting and driving 5-77
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL
(ICC) (if so equipped)
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of
the following three methods:
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
and release the COAST/SET switch.
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you
desire, release the switch.
∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RES
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed increases by about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.
∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows to the desired speed.
∙ Push and release the COAST/SET
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed decreases by about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph).
5-78 Starting and driving
To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
returns to the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 40 km/h (25 mph).
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could
result in serious injury or death.
∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist the
driver and is not a collision warning or
avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and
be in control of the vehicle at all times.
∙ Always observe posted speed limits and
do not set the speed over them.
∙ Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To
avoid serious injury or death, do not rely
on the system to prevent accidents or to
control the vehicle’s speed in emergency
situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic
conditions.
LSD2702
The ICC system is intended to enhance the
operation of the vehicle when following a
vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.
A loThe ICC system uses a radar sensor 䊊
cated on the front of the vehicle to detect
vehicles traveling ahead.
If the radar sensor detects a slower moving
vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the
vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 120 m (390 ft) ahead.
LSD2610
Starting and driving 5-79
ICC SYSTEM OPERATION
The ICC system maintains a selected distance
from the vehicle in front of you within the
speed range 0 to 144km/h (0 to 90 mph) up
to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 32 to 144 km/h
(20 to 90 mph) for Mexico or 32 to 189 km/h
(20 to 118 mph) for Gulf Coast countries,
based on road conditions.
The vehicle travels at the set speed when the
road ahead is clear.
The ICC system is designed to maintain a
selected distance from the vehicle in front of
you and can reduce the speed to match a
slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC
system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking power.
This system should only be used when traffic
conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain
fairly constant or when vehicle speeds
change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the
traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling
ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because
the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle
quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system
5-80 Starting and driving
will sound a warning chime and blink the
system display to notify the driver to take
necessary action.
For additional information, refer to “Approach warning” in this section.
The following items are controlled in the ICC
system:
∙ When there are no vehicles traveling
ahead, the ICC system maintains the
speed set by the driver. The set speed
range is between approximately 32 and
144 km/h (20 and 90 mph) for Mexico or
32 to 189 km/h (20 to 118 mph) for Gulf
Coast countries.
∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,
the ICC system adjusts the speed to
maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will
cancel once it judges a standstill with a
warning chime.
∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has
moved out from its lane of travel, the ICC
system accelerates and maintains vehicle
speed up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must
pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead
when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.
your vehicle when acceleration is required for
a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when
deceleration is required to maintain a safe
distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay
alert when using the ICC system.
ICC (Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control) mode
SSD0254
When driving on the freeway at a set speed
and approaching a slower traveling vehicle
ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed
to maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the
ICC system will accelerate and maintain the
speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to
the driving operation to maintain control of
the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
Normally when controlling the distance to a
vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the ICC system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle
traveling in front of you according to that
vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at the
set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle
traveling in the same lane and direction.
If the radar sensor detects a slower moving
vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the
vehicle in front at the selected distance.
Preview Function
The ICC system with the Preview Function
identifies the need to apply emergency braking by sensing a vehicle ahead in the same
lane, and the distance and relative speed
from it. The system applies the brake prepressure before the driver depresses the
brake pedal and helps improve brake response by reducing pedal free play.
∙ This system will not operate when the
vehicle is moving at approximately
32 km/h (20 mph) or less.
∙ The pre-pressure function ceases when
the following conditions are met:
– When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
– If the driver does not operate the accelerator or brake pedal within approximately 1 second.
The system automatically controls the
throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if
necessary. The detection range of the sensor
is approximately 200 m (650 ft) ahead.
Starting and driving 5-81
SSD0338
∙ The sensor will not detect:
– Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
– Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
– Motorcycles traveling offset in the
travel lane as illustrated
WARNING
∙ This system is only an aid to assist braking
operation and is not a collision warning or
avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.
∙ As there is a performance limit to the Preview Function, never rely solely on this
5-82 Starting and driving
system. This system does not correct
careless, inattentive or absentminded
driving, or overcome poor visibility in
rain, fog, or other bad weather. Reduce
vehicle speed by depressing the brake
pedal, in order to maintain a safe distance
between vehicles.
∙ The system may not detect the vehicle in
front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. The Preview Function may
not operate properly under the following
conditions. The vehicle is still driveable
under normal conditions and the Brake
Assist will operate.
– When rain or snow adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor
– Vehicle position in the lane may cause
the sensor to temporarily not detect a
vehicle in the same lane or may detect
objects or vehicles in other lanes.
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode
This mode allows driving at a speed between
32 to 144 km/h (20 to 90 mph) for Mexico,
32 to 144 km/h (20 to 90 mph) for Taiwan or
32 to 189 km/h (20 to 117 mph) for Gulf
Coast Countries without keeping your foot
on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING
∙ In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, a warning chime does not
sound to warn you if you are too close to
the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence
of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-tovehicle distance is detected.
∙ Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead
of you or a collision could occur.
∙ Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent Cruise Control system display.
∙ Do not use the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode when driving under
the following conditions:
– when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
– in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed
– on winding or hilly roads
– on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
– in very windy areas
∙ Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
3. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing
the set speed.
4. DISTANCE
switch*:
Changes the vehicle’s following distance:
∙ Long
∙ Middle
Selecting the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode
To choose the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, refer to “Operating conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode” in this section.
∙ Short
5. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:
LSD2056
THE ICC SWITCH
The system is operated by the CRUISE
ON/OFF switch and four control switches,
all mounted on the steering wheel.
1. ACCEL/RES switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed
incrementally.
2. COAST/SET switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally.
Master switch to activate the system.
*: This switch only affects the vehicle-tovehicle control mode, not the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode.
How to select the cruise control
mode
Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode
To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, quickly push and release the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch.
Starting and driving 5-83
∙ ICC system warning (orange): Indicates that if there is a malfunction in
the ICC system.
2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in
front of you.
3. Set distance indicator:
Displays the selected distance between
vehicles set with the distance switch.
4. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
LSD2534
ICC (vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control) mode display and
indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. CRUISE ON/OFF switch indicator:
∙ ICC system ON indicator (white): Indicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch is ON.
∙ ICC system SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set.
5-84 Starting and driving
LSD2067
Preview function warning light and display
When the Preview Function is not operating
properly, the chime sounds and the system
warning light (orange) will come on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle
in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart
the engine and resume driving.
If the indicator stays on, it may indicate that
the Preview Function is malfunctioning (the
brake is operative). Although the vehicle is
still driveable under normal conditions, have
the vehicle checked. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Comes on if there is a malfunction in the
cruise control system.
LSD2075
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode display and indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. CRUISE ON/OFF switch indicator:
Indicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch is on.
2. Cruise set switch indicator:
Displays while the vehicle speed is controlled by the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode of the ICC system.
3. Cruise system warning light:
Starting and driving 5-85
vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
LSD2067
LSD2120
Warning light
OPERATING ICC
When the system is not operating properly,
the chime sounds and the system warning
light (orange) will come on.
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
A.
and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch 䊊
The ICC system ON indicator (white), set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on in a standby state for setting.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle
in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart
the engine, resume driving and then perform
the setting again.
If it is not possible to set or the indicator
stays on, it may indicate that the system is
malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still
driveable under normal conditions, have the
5-86 Starting and driving
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or Manual mode
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When the brakes are operated by the
driver
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.
A warning chime will sound and a message
will pop up:
LSD2125
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle
to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET
switch and release it. The ICC system set
indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle
B will come on. Take your
speed indicator 䊊
foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle
will maintain the set speed.
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set and the ICC indicators will blink for
approximately 2 seconds:
∙ When traveling below 32 km/h (20 mph)
and a vehicle ahead is not detected
∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the
ICC system, turn on the VDC system.
Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch to
turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC
switch by pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch again.)
For additional information about the
VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in this section.
∙ When ABS or VDC is operating
∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC
system, make sure the wheels are no longer slipping. Push the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch to turn off the ICC system, and
reset the ICC system by pushing the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch again.)
LSD2535
1
䊊
2
䊊
System set display with vehicle ahead
System set display without vehicle ahead
Vehicle detected ahead
When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead,
the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by
controlling the throttle and applying the
brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle
ahead. The system then controls the vehicle
speed based on the speed of the vehicle
ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.
Starting and driving 5-87
NOTE:
∙ The stoplights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the ICC
system.
∙ When the brake operates, a noise may be
heard. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle
ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC
system will also display the set speed and
selected distance.
Vehicle ahead not detected
When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead,
the ICC system gradually accelerates your
vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle
speed. The ICC system then maintains the set
speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected, the
vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the
ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle.
When a vehicle is no longer detected under
approximately 24 km/h (15 mph), the system
will be canceled.
LSD2557
When passing another vehicle, the set speed
A will flash when the vehicle speed
indicator 䊊
exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect
indicator will turn off when the area ahead of
the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the
ICC system, you can depress the accelerator
pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your
vehicle rapidly.
LSD2535
1
䊊
2
䊊
System set display with vehicle ahead
System set display without vehicle ahead
How to change the set vehicle
speed
To cancel the preset speed: use one of the
following methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
∙ Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off.
The ICC indicators will go out.
5-88 Starting and driving
To reset at a faster cruising speed: use one of
the following methods:
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
and release the COAST/SET switch.
To resume the preset speed: push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
will resume the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 32 km/h (20 mph).
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
The set vehicle speed will increase by
approximately 5 km/h (5 mph).
∙ Push,
then
quickly
release
the
ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 km/h (1 mph).
To reset at a slower cruising speed: use one
of the following methods:
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.
∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
The set vehicle speed will decrease by
approximately 5 km/h (5 mph).
∙ Push,
then
quickly
release
the
COAST/SET switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 km/h (1 mph).
LSD2061
How to change the set distance to
the vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be
selected at any time depending on the traffic
conditions.
A is pushed,
Each time the distance switch 䊊
the set distance will change to long, middle,
short and back to long again, in that sequence.
Starting and driving 5-89
Approach warning
NOTE:
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system
warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the
brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:
The approach warning chime may sound and
the system display may blink when the ICC
sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may
cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect
these objects when the vehicle is driven on
winding roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or
when entering or exiting a curve. In these
cases you will have to manually control the
proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
∙ The chime sounds.
∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator
blinks.
LSD2429
Distance
Approximate distance at
100 km/h (60 mph) [m (ft)]
1.
Long
55 (180)
2.
Middle
40 (130)
3.
Short
25 (80)
∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will
change according to the vehicle speed.
The higher the vehicle speed, the longer
the distance.
∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance
becomes “long.” (Each time the engine is
started, the initial setting becomes “long.”)
5-90 Starting and driving
The warning chime may not sound in some
cases when there is a short distance between
vehicles. Some examples are:
∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing.
∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between vehicles
is increasing.
∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when:
∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles
that are parked or moving slowly.
∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected
by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or
driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is
being driven with some damage).
The CRUISE indicator stays lit. You can now
set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch again will turn the
system completely off.
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off. To use the ICC again, quickly
push and release the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode) or push and hold it (conventional fixed
speed cruise control mode) again to turn it on.
LSD2076
OPERATING CONVENTIONAL
(fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL
MODE
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the
A for longer than
CRUISE ON/OFF switch 䊊
about 1.5 seconds.
When pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF switch
on, the ICC system display and the CRUISE
indicator are displayed in the vehicle information display. After you hold the CRUISE
ON/OFF switch on for longer than about
1.5 seconds, the ICC system display goes out.
When the Distance Control Assist (DCA) system is on, the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode cannot be turned on
even though the CRUISE ON/OFF switch is
pushed and held.
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, turn off the DCA system. For additional information, refer to “Distance Control Assist (DCA)” in this section.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ON/OFF switch
off when not using the ICC.
LSD2066
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle
to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET
switch and release it. (The SET indicator will
come on in the display.) Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain
the set speed.
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep hills.
If this happens, manually maintain vehicle
speed.
Starting and driving 5-91
To cancel the preset speed, use any of the
following methods:
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:
1. Press the CANCEL button. The SET indicator will go out.
1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator
will go out.
3. Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off.
Both the CRUISE indicator and SET indicator will go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of
the following three methods:
1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
and release the COAST/SET switch.
2. Push and hold the ACCEL/RES set
switch. When the vehicle attains the
speed you desire, release the switch.
3. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/
RES switch. Each time you do this, the
set speed will increase by about
1.6 km/h (1 mph).
5-92 Starting and driving
2. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows down to the desired speed.
3. Push, then quickly release the
COAST/SET switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by about
1.6 km/h (1 mph).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
will resume the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 40 km/h (25 mph).
Automatic cancellation
Under the following conditions, a chime will
sound and the system control is automatically canceled:
∙ When the vehicle speed falls below
approximately 32 km/h (20 mph)
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or Manual mode
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When the VDC (including the TCS)
operates
∙ When a wheel slips
∙ As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely
on the ICC system. This system does not
correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing
the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
SSD0252
ICC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The ICC system is primarily intended for
use on straight, dry, open roads with light
traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC
system in city traffic or congested areas.
∙ The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system
should be used in evenly flowing traffic.
Do not use the system on roads with
sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy
rain or in fog.
∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
vehicle decelerates to a standstill within
the limitations of the system. The system
will cancel once it judges that the vehicle
has come to a standstill and sound a
warning chime. To prevent the vehicle
from moving, the driver must depress the
brake pedal.
∙ Always pay attention to the operation of
the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The
ICC system may not be able to maintain
the selected distance between vehicles
(following distance) or selected vehicle
speed under some circumstances.
Starting and driving 5-93
∙ The system may not detect the vehicle in
front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. To avoid accidents, never use
the ICC system under the following
conditions:
– On roads where the traffic is heavy or
there are sharp curves
– On slippery road surfaces such as on
ice or snow, etc.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.)
– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the
bumper around the distance sensor
– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle
may go beyond the set vehicle speed
and frequent braking may result in
overheating the brakes)
– On repeated uphill and downhill roads
– When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent
acceleration or deceleration
– Interference by other radar sources.
∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a
vehicle ahead.
5-94 Starting and driving
∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come
into the sensor detection zone and cause
automatic braking. Always stay alert and
avoid using the ICC system where not
recommended in this warning section.
The radar sensor will not detect the following
objects:
∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles
∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel
lane
The following are some conditions in which
the sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle
ahead and the system may not operate properly:
∙ When snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.
∙ When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or the cargo area
of your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s operation within the limitations of the system.
The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection
zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within the
same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be
detected in the same lane ahead if they are
traveling offset from the centerline of the
lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead
may not be detected until the vehicle has
completely moved into the lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you
by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from
the vehicle traveling ahead.
SSD0253
When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads
which are under construction, the ICC sensor
may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may
temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling
ahead. This may cause the ICC system to
decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you
by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to
manually control the proper distance away
from the vehicle traveling ahead.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or
vehicle condition.
Starting and driving 5-95
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
The following are conditions in which the ICC
system may be temporarily unavailable. In
these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle
ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will
sound and the system will not be able to be
set:
∙ When the VDC system is turned off
∙ When the VDC or ABS operates
∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected and
your vehicle is traveling below the speed
of 24 km/h (15 mph)
∙ When the system judges the vehicle is at
a standstill
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or Manual mode
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When a wheel slips
LSD2615
5-96 Starting and driving
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ICC
CRUISE ON/OFF switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.
Condition B
When the radar sensor area of the front
bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed,
the ICC system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor area is covered with ice, a
transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the
ICC system may not detect vehicles ahead. In
these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle
ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor
area.
The system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front radar
blocked” warning message will appear in the
vehicle information display.
LSD2174
LSD2175
Action to take
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, park
the vehicle in a safe location and turn the
engine off. Check to see if the radar sensor
window is blocked. If the radar sensor window is blocked, remove the blocking material.
Restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the ICC system
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle
in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart
the engine, resume driving and set the ICC
system again.
Condition C
When the ICC system is not operating properly, a chime sounds and the system warning
light (orange) will come on.
If it is not possible to set the system or the
indicator stays on, it may indicate that the
system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions,
have the vehicle checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
Starting and driving 5-97
∙ Do not touch or remove the screw located on the sensor. Doing so could
cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor
is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the sensor. This could cause failure
or malfunction.
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.) This could
cause failure or malfunction.
LSD2702
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
A is located
The sensor for the ICC system 䊊
on the front of the vehicle.
To keep the ICC system operating properly,
be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the sensor area clean.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensor.
5-98 Starting and driving
∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring
the front bumper, it is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer.
Radio frequency statement
For Mexico
Continental ARS3–B
Certificado de homologacion:
RVLCOAR10–0980–A1
Este equipo opera a titulo secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias
perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma
clase y puede no causar interferencias a
sistemas operando a titulo primario.
Cofetel notice:
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo
no cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA)
(if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the DCA system
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ DCA helps maintain a distance to the vehicle in front under certain conditions. It
is not a collision avoidance system. Failure to apply the brakes could result in an
accident.
LSD2640
For U.A.E.
LSD2641
For Qatar
For Lebanon
From the Lebanese Telecommunications
Ministry:
Type Approval Number:
LEB\TYPE\385 102 O&M 2012
For Jordan
TRC’s Type Approval Certificate Number:
TRC/LPD/2012/5
∙ Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the DCA system. Read and
understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the DCA system. Do
not use the DCA system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.
∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
vehicle decelerates to a standstill within
the limitations of the system. The system
will cancel once it judges that the vehicle
has come to a standstill with a warning
chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake
pedal.
∙ The DCA system will not apply brake
control while the driver’s foot is on the
accelerator pedal.
Starting and driving 5-99
The DCA system brakes and moves the accelerator pedal upward according to the distance from and the relative speed of the vehicle ahead to help assist the driver to
maintain a following distance.
The system is intended to assist the driver to
keep a following distance from the vehicle
ahead traveling in the same lane and direction.
The distance sensor is located behind the
A . If the distance sensor 䊊
A
front bumper 䊊
detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the
system will reduce the vehicle speed to help
assist the driver to maintain a following distance.
The system automatically controls the
throttle and applies the brakes (up to 40% of
vehicle braking power) if necessary.
LSD2702
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 150 m (490 ft) ahead.
Always pay attention to the operation of the
vehicle and be ready to manually decelerate
to maintain the proper following distance.
The DCA system may not be able to decelerate the vehicle under some circumstances.
The distance sensor will not detect the following objects:
DCA SYSTEM OPERATION
A located
The DCA system uses a sensor 䊊
behind the front bumper of the vehicle to
detect vehicles traveling ahead. The sensor
generally detects the signals returned from
the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor
cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle
ahead, the DCA system may not operate.
5-100 Starting and driving
∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles
∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
The DCA system helps assist the driver to
keep a following distance to the vehicle
ahead by braking and moving the accelerator
pedal upward in the normal driving condition.
When a vehicle is detected ahead:
The vehicle ahead detection indicator comes
on.
When vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead:
LSD2068
DCA Indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. DCA system switch indicator:
Indicates that the dynamic driver assistance switch is on.
LIC2889
2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in
front of you.
WARNING
The DCA system automatically decelerates
your vehicle to help assist the driver to
maintain a following distance from the vehicle ahead. Manually brake when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance upon sudden braking by the vehicle
ahead or when a vehicle suddenly appears
in front of you. Always stay alert when using the DCA system.
∙ If the driver’s foot is not on the accelerator pedal, the system activates the brakes
to decelerate smoothly as necessary. If
the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
vehicle decelerates to a standstill within
the limitations of the system.
∙ If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator
pedal, the system moves the accelerator
pedal upward to assist the driver to release the accelerator pedal.
When brake operation by driver is required:
The system alerts the driver by a warning
chime and blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator. If the driver’s foot is on the
accelerator pedal after the warning, the system moves the accelerator pedal upward to
assist the driver to switch to the brake pedal.
Starting and driving 5-101
The stoplights of the vehicle come on when
braking is performed by the DCA system.
When the brake operates, a noise may be
heard. This is not a malfunction.
WARNING
∙ When the vehicle ahead detection indicator light is not illuminated, the system
will not control or warn the driver.
∙ Depending on the position of the accelerator pedal, the system may not be able
to assist the driver to release the accelerator pedal appropriately.
∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a standstill,
the vehicle decelerates to a standstill
within the limitations of the system. The
system will release brake control with a
warning chime once it judges the vehicle
is at a standstill. To prevent the vehicle
from moving, the driver must depress the
brake pedal. (The system will resume
control automatically once the system
reaches 5 km/h [3 mph]).
5-102 Starting and driving
Overriding the system:
The following driver’s operations override the
system operation.
∙ When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal even further while the system is
moving the accelerator pedal upward,
the DCA system control of the accelerator pedal is canceled.
∙ When the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal, the brake control by the system
is not operated.
∙ When the driver’s foot is on the brake
pedal, neither the brake control nor the
alert by the system operates.
∙ When the ICC system is set, the DCA
system will be canceled.
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
DCA SYSTEM
To turn on the DCA system, push the dynamic
1 on the steering
driver assistance switch 䊊
wheel after starting the engine. The DCA
2 in the vehicle
system switch indicator light 䊊
information display will illuminate. Push the
dynamic driver assistance switch again to
turn off the DCA system. The DCA system
switch indicator light will turn off.
The system will start to operate after the
vehicle speed becomes above approximately
5 km/h (3 mph).
The dynamic driver assistance switch is used
for the LDP, DCA and BSI systems. When the
dynamic driver assistance switch is pushed,
the LDP system will also turn on or off simultaneously. The DCA system can be individually set to on or off on the display. If the
system is set to off, the system will not turn
on even if the dynamic driver assistance
switch is pushed to on. To set the system to
on or off in the vehicle information display,
refer to “Setting DCA system to ON/OFF” in
this section.
LSD2552
Starting and driving 5-103
Setting DCA system to ON/OFF:
The DCA can be turned on/off in the vehicle
information display using the buttons on the
steering wheel.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids,” and press the ENTER button.
3. Select “Forward,” and press the ENTER
button.
4. To turn on the “Assistance (DCA)” check
the box using the ENTER button.
If the LDP, BSI and DCA systems are set to
off in the vehicle information display and the
dynamic driver assistance switch is pushed,
the LDW ON indicator light, BSI ON indicator
light, and the DCA system switch indicator
light will blink for approximately 2 seconds.
For additional information on LDP and BSI,
refer to “Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)”
and “Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)” in this
section.
DCA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
∙ This system is only an aid to assist the
driver and is not a collision warning or
avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and
be in control of the vehicle at all times.
∙ This system will not adapt automatically
to road conditions.
∙ As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely
on the DCA system. This system does not
correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing
the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
∙ The system may not detect the vehicle in
front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. To avoid accidents, never use
the DCA system under the following
conditions:
– On roads with sharp curves
5-104 Starting and driving
– On slippery road surfaces such as on
ice or snow, etc.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.)
– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the
sensor area of the front bumper
– On steep downhill roads (frequent
braking may result in overheating the
brakes)
– On repeated uphill and downhill roads
∙ Do not use the DCA system if you are
towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead.
∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come
into the sensor detection zone and cause
automatic braking. You may need to control the distance from other vehicles using the accelerator pedal. Always stay
alert and avoid using the DCA system
where not recommended in this warning
section.
The following are some conditions in which
the sensor cannot detect the signals:
∙ When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is
covered with dirt, snow and road spray
∙ When dense exhaust or other smoke
(black smoke) from vehicles reduces the
sensor’s detection
∙ When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or the luggage
room of your vehicle
The DCA system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s operation. When the front
bumper area around the distance sensor is
covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system
will automatically cancel. If the front bumper
area of the distance sensor is covered with
ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,
etc., the DCA system may not detect them. In
these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and may
not be able to maintain the selected following
distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to
check and clean the front bumper area
around the distance sensor regularly.
to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the DCA system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking
power. If a vehicle moves into the traveling
lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead
rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the DCA
system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly
enough. If this occurs, the DCA system will
sound a warning chime and blink the system
display to notify the driver to take necessary
action.
For additional information, refer to “Approach warning” in this section.
This system only brakes and moves the accelerator pedal upward to help assist the driver
to maintain a following distance from the
vehicle ahead. Acceleration should be operated by the driver.
The DCA system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must
pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead.
The DCA system is designed to help assist the
driver to maintain a following distance from
the vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate
as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes
Starting and driving 5-105
SSD0252
DCA Detection Zone
DCA DRIVING SITUATIONS
The detection zone of the sensor is limited. A
vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone
for the system to operate.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within the
same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be
detected in the same lane ahead if they are
traveling offset from the center line of the
lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead
may not be detected until the vehicle has
completely moved into the lane.
5-106 Starting and driving
If this occurs, the system may warn you by
blinking the system indicator and sounding
the chime. The driver may have to manually
control the proper distance away from the
vehicle traveling ahead.
Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system
warns the driver with the chime and DCA
system display. Decelerate by depressing the
brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:
∙ The chime sounds.
∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator
blinks.
SSD0253
DCA Detection Zones On Winding Roads
When driving on some roads, such as windIf this occurs, the system may warn you by
ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads
blinking the system indicator and sounding
which are under construction, the sensor may
the chime unexpectedly. You will have to
detect vehicles in a different lane, or may
manually control the proper distance away
temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling
from the vehicle traveling ahead.
ahead. This may cause the system to work
inappropriately.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or
vehicle condition.
The warning chime may not sound in some
cases when there is a short distance between
vehicles. Some examples are:
∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing
∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between vehicles
is increasing
∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle
The warning chime will not sound when your
vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked
or moving slowly.
Starting and driving 5-107
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by
vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle
condition (for example, if a vehicle is being
driven with some damage).
SSD0284A
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound and
the system display may blink when ICC senA or obsor detects vehicles in other lanes 䊊
A . This may
jects on the side of the road 䊊
cause the DCA system to operate inappropriately. The ICC sensor may detect these
objects when the vehicle is driven on winding
roads, narrow roads, hilly roads or when entering or exiting a curve. In these cases you
will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
LSD2080
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Under the following conditions, the DCA system will not operate and the DCA cancellation message will pop up:
∙ When the SNOW mode switch is selected by using the INFINITI Drive Mode
Selector (To use the DCA system, turn off
the SNOW mode, then turn on the dynamic driver assistance switch.)
For additional information about the
SNOW mode switch, refer to “Snow
mode” in this section.
5-108 Starting and driving
∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the
DCA system, turn on the VDC, then push
the dynamic driver assistance switch.)
For additional information about the
VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in this section.
∙ When ABS or VDC (including the TCS) is
operating
When the Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode is operating, the DCA system
will not operate. (To use the DCA system,
turn the Conventional [fixed speed] cruise
control mode off, then push the dynamic
driver assistance switch.)
For additional information about the Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode,
refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in
this section.
When the engine is turned off, the system is
automatically turned off.
1
䊊
2
䊊
LSD2126
LSD2080
System set display with vehicle ahead
∙ When the VDC system is turned off
System set display without vehicle ahead
∙ When the VDC or ABS operates
Automatic cancellation
Condition A:
Under the following conditions, the DCA system is automatically canceled. The chime will
sound and the DCA cancellation message will
display.
∙ When SNOW mode is selected by using
the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off with the
dynamic driver assistance switch. Turn the
DCA system back on to use the system.
Starting and driving 5-109
Condition B:
If it is not possible to set the system or the
indicator stays on, it may indicate that the
system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions,
have the vehicle checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
When the sensor area of the front bumper is
dirty, making it impossible to detect a vehicle
ahead, the DCA system is automatically canceled.
The chime sounds and the system warning
light (orange) will come on and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” indicator will
appear.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor for the DCA system is common
with ICC and is located behind the front bumper.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle
in a safe place, turn the engine off. Clean the
sensor area of the bumper and then perform
the settings again.
LSD2081
DCA warning light (orange)
Condition C:
When the DCA system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the system warning light (“DCA” orange) will come on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle
in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart
the engine, and turn on the DCA system
again.
5-110 Starting and driving
For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in this section.
Radio frequency statement
For Mexico
Continental ARS3–B
Certificado de homologacion:
RVLCOAR10–0980–A1
Este equipo opera a titulo secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias
perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma
clase y puede no causar interferencias a
sistemas operando a titulo primario.
Cofetel notice:
“La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo
no cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
LSD2640
For U.A.E.
LSD2641
For Qatar
For Lebanon
From the Lebanese Telecommunications
Ministry:
Type Approval Number:
LEB\TYPE\385 102 O&M 2012
For Jordan
TRC’s Type Approval Certificate Number:
TRC/LPD/2012/5
Starting and driving 5-111
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
(FEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It
is not a replacement for the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent
accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
can assist the driver when there is a risk of a
forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the
traveling lane or with a pedestrian.
5-112 Starting and driving
LSD2703
The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
A located behind the
uses a radar sensor 䊊
lower grille of the front bumper to measure
the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same
lane. For pedestrians, the FEB with PedesB intrian Detection system uses a camera 䊊
stalled behind the windshield in addition to
the radar sensor.
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. FEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator
3. FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light
SYSTEM OPERATION
The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
operates at speeds above approximately
5 km/h (3 mph). For the Pedestrian Detection
function, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system operates at speeds between 10 –
60 km/h (6 – 37 mph).
If a risk of a forward collision with a vehicle is
detected, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system will first provide a warning to the
driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection
indicator and providing an audible alert. In
addition, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system pushes the accelerator pedal up, and
then the system applies partial braking. If the
driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully, but the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system detects that there is still the possibility
of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force.
LSD2639
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent
and the driver does not take action, the FEB
with Pedestrian Detection system issues the
Starting and driving 5-113
second warning to the driver by flashing the
FEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency
warning indicator (red), providing an audible
warning, and then automatically applies
harder braking.
If a risk of a forward impact with a pedestrian
is detected, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will provide a warning to the
driver by flashing the FEB with Pedestrian
Detection emergency warning indicator (red),
provides an audible alert and the system will
apply partial baking. If the driver applies the
brakes quickly and forcefully but the FEB
with Pedestrian Detection system detects
that there is still the possibility of a forward
impact with a pedestrian, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the
risk of collision becomes imminent and the
driver does not take action, the FEB with
Pedestrian Detection system automatically
applies harder braking.
NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when any
braking is performed by the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
5-114 Starting and driving
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to
the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as
driving and roadway conditions, the system
may help the driver avoid a forward collision
or may help mitigate the consequences if a
collision should be unavoidable. If the driver is
handling the steering wheel, accelerating or
braking, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system will function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the
following conditions:
∙ When the steering wheel is turned to
avoid a collision.
∙ When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
∙ When there is no longer a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected ahead.
If the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.
TURNING THE FEB WITH
PEDESTRIAN DETECTION
SYSTEM ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Emergency Braking” and press
the ENTER button.
3. Select “System” and press the ENTER
button.
When the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is turned off, the FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be automatically turned on
when the engine is restarted.
LSD2586
Starting and driving 5-115
∙ The PFCW system (if so equipped) is integrated into the FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information
display for the PFCW system. When the
FEB with Pedestrian Detection is turned
off, the PFCW system is also turned off.
FEB WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
– Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using
mobile transport such as scooters,
child-operated toys, or skateboards.
– Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or
walking position.
– Oncoming vehicles
– Crossing vehicles
– Obstacles on the roadside
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system has some performance limitations.
Listed below are the system limitations for
the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance
with these system limitations could result
in serious injury or death.
– If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle’s
path, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the
vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 80 km/h (50 mph).
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions.
– For pedestrian detection, the FEB
with Pedestrian Detection system will
not function when the vehicle is driven
at speeds over approximately
60 km/h (37 mph) or below approximately 10 km/h (6 mph).
∙ The radar sensor FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system does not detect the
following objects:
– Small pedestrians (including small
children), animals and cyclists.
5-116 Starting and driving
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function for pedestrians in
darkness or in tunnels, even if there is
street lighting in the area.
∙ For pedestrians, the FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system will not issue the first
warning and will not push the accelerator
pedal up.
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the vehicle ahead
is narrow (for example, a motorcycle).
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if speed difference
between the two vehicles is too small.
∙ The radar sensor FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system may not function properly or detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:
– Poor visibility (conditions such as rain,
snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms,
and road spray from other vehicles)
– Driving on a steep downhill slope or
roads with sharp curves.
– Driving on a bumpy road surface, such
as an uneven dirt road.
– If dirt, ice, snow or other material is
covering the radar sensor area.
– Interference by other radar sources.
– The camera area of windshield is
fogged up, or covered with dirt, water
drops, ice, snow, etc.
– Excessively heavy baggage is loaded
in the rear seat or the trunk room of
your vehicle.
– Strong light (for example, sunlight or
high beams from oncoming vehicles)
enters the front camera. Strong light
causes the area around the pedestrian
to be cast in a shadow, making it difficult to see.
∙ The system is designed to automatically
check the sensors’ (radar and camera)
functionality, within certain limitations.
The system may not detect blockage of
sensor areas covered by ice, snow or
stickers, for example. In these cases, the
system may not be able to warn the
driver properly. Be sure that you check,
clean and clear sensor areas regularly.
– A sudden change in brightness occurs.
(For example, when the vehicle enters
or exits a tunnel or a shaded area or
lightning flashes.)
– The poor contrast of a person to the
background, such as having clothing
color or pattern which is similar to the
background.
– The pedestrian’s profile is partially
obscured or unidentifiable due to the
pedestrian transporting luggage,
wearing bulky or very loose-fitting
clothing or accessories.
∙ In some road and traffic conditions, the
FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
may unexpectedly apply partial braking.
When acceleration is necessary, depress
the accelerator pedal to override the
system.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime may
not be heard.
∙ The system performance may degrade in
the following conditions:
– The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
– The vehicle is driven on a slope.
Starting and driving 5-117
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A:
In the following conditions, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light
blinks and the system will be turned off automatically.
∙ The radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source.
∙ The camera area of the windshield is
misted or frozen.
∙ Strong light is shining from the front.
∙ The cabin temperature is over approximately 40°C (104°F) in direct sunlight.
∙ The camera area of the windshield glass
is continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
will resume automatically.
LSD2591
5-118 Starting and driving
NOTE:
NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield or camera
area is misted or frozen, it will take a period
of time to remove it after A/C turns ON. If
dirt appears on this area, visit an INFINITI
retailer.
If the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
stops working, the PFCW system (if so
equipped) will also stop working.
Condition B:
In the following conditions, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light will
illuminate and the system will be turned off
automatically and the “Unavailable: Front
Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
∙ The sensor area of the front bumper is
covered with dirt or is obstructed.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever
in the P (Park) position and turn the engine
off. Clean the radar sensor area of the front
bumper or the camera area of the windshield
with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the
warning light continues to illuminate, have
the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange)
will illuminate and the warning message
[Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine
off and restart the engine. If the warning light
continues to illuminate, have the FEB with
Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
NOTE:
If the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
stops working, the PFCW system (if so
equipped) will also stop working.
LSD2703
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
A is located behind the
The radar sensor 䊊
lower grille of the front bumper. The camera
B is located on the upper side of the wind䊊
shield.
To keep the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep sensor areas of the front
bumper and windshield clean.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensors (ex. Bumper, windshield).
Starting and driving 5-119
∙ Do not cover or attach stickers, or install
any accessory near the sensors. This
could block sensor signals, and/or cause
failure or malfunction.
Radio frequency statement
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction.
Certificado de homologacion:
RVLCOAR10–0980–A1
∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as
white paper or a mirror, on the instrument
panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s detection
capability.
∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring
the front bumper, contact an INFINITI
retailer.
For Mexico
Continental ARS3–B
Este equipo opera a titulo secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias
perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma
clase y puede no causar interferencias a
sistemas operando a titulo primario.
Cofetel notice:
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo
no cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
5-120 Starting and driving
LSD2640
For U.A.E.
PREDICTIVE FORWARD COLLISION
WARNING (PFCW) (if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the PFCW system
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The PFCW system can help warn the
driver before a collision occurs but will
not avoid a collision. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and
be in control of the vehicle at all times.
LSD2641
For Qatar
For Lebanon
From the Lebanese Telecommunications
Ministry:
The PFCW system can help alert the driver
when there is a sudden braking of a second
vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead
in the same lane.
LSD2702
A
The PFCW system uses a radar sensor 䊊
located behind the lower grille of the front
bumper to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.
Type Approval Number:
LEB\TYPE\385 102 O&M 2012
For Jordan
TRC’s Type Approval Certificate Number:
TRC/LPD/2012/5
Starting and driving 5-121
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. FEB system warning light
LSD2524
5-122 Starting and driving
LSD2263
PFCW SYSTEM OPERATION
The PFCW system operates at speeds above
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the PFCW system will warn the driver
by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.
Starting and driving 5-123
TURNING THE PFCW SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the
PFCW system ON or OFF.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance”. Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Emergency Braking” and press
the ENTER button.
3. Select “System” and press the ENTER
button.
When the PFCW system is turned off, the
FEB system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
∙ The PFCW system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is restarted.
∙ The PFCW system (if so equipped) is integrated into the FEB system. There is
not a separate selection in the vehicle
information display for the PFCW system. When the FEB is turned off, the
PFCW system is also turned off.
LSD2609
5-124 Starting and driving
LSD2312
Illustration A
Starting and driving 5-125
LSD2265
Illustration B
PFCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in
the roadway
– Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.
– Oncoming vehicles
– Interference by other radar sources.
– Crossing vehicles
– Snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles.
Listed below are the system limitations for
the PFCW system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ (Illustration A) The PFCW system does
not function when a vehicle ahead is a
narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.
∙ The PFCW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle
ahead in the following conditions:
∙ The radar sensor does not detect the following objects:
5-126 Starting and driving
– Snow or heavy rain
– Driving in a tunnel
– (Illustration B) When the vehicle
ahead is being towed.
– (Illustration C) When the distance to
the vehicle ahead is too close, the
beam of the radar sensor is
obstructed.
– (Illustration D) When driving on a
steep downhill slope or roads with
sharp curves.
∙ The system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s functionality, within
certain limitations. The system may not
detect some forms of obstruction of the
sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers,
etc. In these cases, the system may not be
able to warn the driver properly. Be sure
that you check, clean and clear the sensor
area regularly.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime may
not be heard.
Starting and driving 5-127
LSD2266
Illustration C
5-128 Starting and driving
LSD2313
Illustration D
Starting and driving 5-129
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the PFCW
system is automatically turned off.
The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the PFCW system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When the sensor area of the front bumper is
covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
PFCW system is automatically turned off.
The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light (orange) will illuminate and the
“Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”
warning message will appear in the vehicle
information display.
Action to take
LSD2616
5-130 Starting and driving
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever
in the P (Park) position and turn the engine
off. Clean the radar cover on the lower grille
with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the
warning light continues to illuminate, have
the PFCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for
this service.
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could
cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring
the front bumper, it is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer.
NOTE:
Radio frequency statement
If the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
stops working, the PFCW system (if so
equipped) will also stop working.
For Mexico
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
Certificado de homologacion:
RVLCOAR10–0980–A1
If the PFCW system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will sound,
the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light (orange) will illuminate and the
warning message [Malfunction] will appear
in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine
off and restart the engine. If the warning light
continues to illuminate, have the PFCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Continental ARS3–B
LSD2098
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
A is located behind the lower
The sensor 䊊
grille of the front bumper.
To keep the system operating properly, be
sure to observe the following:
Este equipo opera a titulo secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias
perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma
clase y puede no causar interferencias a
sistemas operando a titulo primario.
Cofetel notice:
∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front
bumper clean.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensor.
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo
no cause interferencia perjudicial y
∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or similar
objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Starting and driving 5-131
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
CAUTION
During the first 2,000 km (1,200 miles),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure
the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine
life and reduced engine performance.
∙ Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run
the engine over 4,000 RPM.
LSD2640
For U.A.E.
LSD2641
For Qatar
∙ Avoid quick starts.
For Lebanon
∙ Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
From the Lebanese Telecommunications
Ministry:
∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 805 km
(500 mi). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
Type Approval Number:
LEB\TYPE\385 102 O&M 2012
For Jordan
TRC’s Type Approval Certificate Number:
TRC/LPD/2012/5
5-132 Starting and driving
∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
∙ Keep your engine tuned up.
∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.
INTELLIGENT ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
(AWD) (if so equipped)
If any malfunction occurs in the Intelligent
AWD system while the engine is running,
messages are displayed in the meter.
∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire
wear and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire
wear and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine
oil. For additional information, refer to
“Recommended SAE viscosity number” in
the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
∙ Please reset the fuel economy meter first
in order to display the correct fuel
economy rate.
LSD2082
If the AWD error warning message is displayed, there may be a malfunction in the
Intelligent AWD system. Reduce vehicle
speed and have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Starting and driving 5-133
WARNING
∙ Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires. Accelerating quickly,
sharp steering maneuvers or sudden
braking may cause loss of control, even
with Intelligent AWD engaged.
LSD2083
LSD2084
The AWD high temperature message may be
displayed while trying to free a stuck vehicle
due to increased oil temperature. The driving
mode may change to 2-wheel drive. If this
message is displayed, stop the vehicle with
the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so.
Then if the message turns off, you can continue driving.
The tire size message may be displayed if
there is a large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels. Pull off the
road in a safe area, with the engine idling.
Check that all tire sizes are the same, that the
tire pressure is correct and that the tires are
not excessively worn.
If any warning messages continue to be displayed, have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
5-134 Starting and driving
∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground
and shift the transmission to any drive or
reverse position with the engine running.
Doing so may result in drivetrain damage
or unexpected vehicle movement which
could result in serious personal injury or
vehicle damage.
∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such
as the dynamometers used by some
states for emissions testing) or similar
equipment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure that
you inform the test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with AWD
before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result
in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious personal injury or vehicle damage.
CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the engine on a free roller
when any of the wheels are raised.
∙ If you use the free roller, rotate four
wheels with the same speed without raising any wheels.
∙ If an AWD warning message is displayed
while driving there may be a malfunction
in the AWD system. Reduce the vehicle
speed immediately and have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ If the tire size incorrect message is displayed while you are driving, pull off the
road in a safe area with the engine idling.
Check that all tire sizes are the same, that
the tire pressure is correct and that the
tires are not excessively worn.
∙ If a warning message continues to be displayed after the above operations, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ The powertrain may be damaged if you
continue driving when the AWD temperature or tire size incorrect messages
are displayed
∙ If the AWD high temperature message is
displayed while you are driving, pull off
the road in a safe area, and idle the engine. The driving mode will change to
2WD to prevent the AWD system from
malfunctioning. If the warning message
turns off, you can drive again.
Starting and driving 5-135
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into traffic when parked on an incline, it
is a good practice to turn the wheels as
illustrated.
∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB
A:
䊊
Turn the wheels into the curb and move
the vehicle forward until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
WSD0050
WARNING
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste
paper or rags. They may ignite and cause
a fire.
∙ Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Failure
to do so could cause the vehicle to move
unexpectedly or roll away and result in an
accident. Make sure the shift lever has
been pushed as far forward as it can go
and cannot be moved without depressing
the foot brake pedal.
5-136 Starting and driving
∙ Never leave the engine running while the
vehicle is unattended.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to cause
a significant risk of injury or death to
people and pets.
B:
∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL,
C:
NO CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away from
the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a trailer
and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle
handling, braking and performance and
may lead to accidents.
CAUTION
∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 805 km (500 miles). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
∙ For the first 805 km (500 miles) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used
primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive
train, steering, braking and other systems.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when towing
a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such
as a motor home.
CAUTION
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)
To tow a vehicle equipped with a CVT, an
appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed
under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
∙ DO NOT tow any CVT vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground (flat towing).
Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission
lubrication.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Towing recommended by INFINITI” in
the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual
Starting and driving 5-137
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION (Gulf Standard models)
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
Maximum Towing Capacity*1
1,500 kg
(3,308 lb.)
Maximum Tongue Load
150 kg
(330 lb.)
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
3,855 kg
(8,500 lb.)
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to
achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION (all except Gulf Standard models)
Maximum Towing Capacity*1
Maximum Tongue Load
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
2,268 kg
(5,000 lb.)
226 kg
(498 lb.)
4,536 kg
(10,000 lb.)
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to
achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.
5-138 Starting and driving
LTI0117
Jumper Harness
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
ELECTRIC TRAILER BRAKE
CONTROLLER (if so equipped)
Trailers equipped with electric brakes may
require the installation of an aftermarket
trailer brake controller.
Your vehicle is equipped with a connector
and jumper harness that is specifically designed to be used when installing an aftermarket brake controller.
To install the electric trailer brake controller
jumper harness, perform the following procedure:
1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to
the rearmost position.
LTI2045
Connector Location
LTI2046
Connector
2. Locate the jumper harness connector
under the lower portion of the instrument panel. The connector is taped to
1 as indicated.
the wiring harness 䊊
∙ The connector is marked with a white tag
with “elec brake conn”.
Starting and driving 5-139
POWER STEERING
Wire color designation for electric trailer
brake controller jumper harness.
WIRE COLOR
NOTE
RED/GREEN
Vehicle stop lamp switch
to trailer brake controller.
BLACK
Brake controller ground (-).
BROWN/WHITE
Trailer brake controller
switched output.
RED/BLUE
Not used
RED
Fused trailer brake
controller battery feed (B+).
3. Peel off the tape and connect the jumper
harness to the connector .
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Install the aftermarket electric trailer
brake controller according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
5-140 Starting and driving
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be
harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of the
vehicle but the steering will be harder to
operate. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
The power steering system is designed to
provide power assist while driving to operate
the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving
at a very low speed, the power assist for the
steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged.
While the power assist is reduced, steering
wheel operation will become heavy. If the
steering wheel operation is still performed,
the power steering may stop and the power
steering warning light will illuminate. In a safe
location, stop the engine and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
The temperature of the power steering system will go down after a period of time and
the power assist level will return to normal
after starting the engine. The power steering
warning light will go off. Avoid repeating
such steering wheel operations that could
cause the power steering system to overheat.
You may hear a sound from the front of the
vehicle when the steering wheel is operated
quickly. This is a normal operational noise and
is not a malfunction.
If the power steering warning light PS illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the power steering system checked. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be
no power assist for the steering but you will
still have control of the vehicle. At this time,
greater steering effort is required to operate
the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns
and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power
steering warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will
still have braking at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can
stop the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the
brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce
gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down
a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes
may reduce braking performance and could
result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and
result in an accident.
∙ If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result,
your braking distance will be longer and the
vehicle may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal
to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes
return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at
high speeds until the brakes function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or rotors are replaced, in order to
assure the best brake performance.
This procedure is described in the INFINITI
Service Manual. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
WARNING
∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it
cannot prevent accidents resulting from
careless or dangerous driving techniques.
It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery
surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front of
you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible
for safety.
∙ Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
Starting and driving 5-141
– When installing a spare tire, make sure
that it is the proper size and type as
specified on the tire placard. For additional information, refer to “Tire placard” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do
not lock during hard braking or when braking
on slippery surfaces. The system detects the
rotation speed at each wheel and varies the
brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel
from locking and sliding. By preventing each
wheel from locking, the system helps the
driver maintain steering control and helps to
minimize swerving and spinning on slippery
surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the
vehicle to avoid obstacles.
5-142 Starting and driving
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may
result in increased stopping distances.
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start
the engine and move the vehicle at a low
speed in forward or reverse. When the selftest occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates
the ABS warning light on the instrument
panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates
at speeds above 5 - 10 km/h (3 - 6 mph). The
speed varies according to road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the
brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation
in the brake pedal and hear a noise from
under the hood or feel a vibration from the
actuator when it is operating. This is normal
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate
that road conditions are hazardous and extra
care is required while driving.
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is
activated generating greater braking force
than a conventional brake booster even with
light pedal force.
WARNING
The brake assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
The VDC system uses various sensors to
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions:
∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power
is transferred to a non-slipping drive
wheel on the same axle.
∙ Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on
vehicle speed (traction control function).
∙ Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
the following conditions:
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes to
note the following:
∙ The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required to
help keep the vehicle on the steered path.
∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working
properly.
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
and
indicator lights come on
the
in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator
lights are on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
indicator illuminates
VDC system. The
to indicate the VDC system is off.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non-slipping drive wheel.
indicator flashes if this occurs. All
The
other VDC functions are off and the
indicator will not flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to on
when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a
pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and
is not an indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain controllability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or by
careless or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.
Starting and driving 5-143
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If
suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not INFINITI recommended for your vehicle or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
operate properly. This could adversely
affect vehicle handling performance, and
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake pads,
rotors and calipers are not INFINITI recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate
and
properly and both the
the
indicator lights may illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
INFINITI recommended or are extremely
and
deteriorated, both the
indicator lights may illuminate.
5-144 Starting and driving
∙ When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the
VDC system may not operate properly
indicator may flash or both
and the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate. Do not drive on these types of
roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface such
as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp,
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.
ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL
(if so equipped)
This system senses driving based on the driver’s steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and controls brake pressure at individual wheels to help smooth vehicle
response.
When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off
the VDC system, the active trace control system is also turned off.
If the active trace control is not functioning
properly, the FEB OFF indicator light illuminates in the instrument panel.
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of force
to each of the four wheels depending on the
radius of the turn.
WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain controllability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or by
careless or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If
suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not INFINITI recommended for your vehicle or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
operate properly. This could adversely
affect vehicle handling performance, and
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake pads,
rotors and calipers are not INFINITI recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate
and
properly and both the
the
indicator lights may illuminate.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
INFINITI recommended or are extremely
and
deteriorated, both the
indicator lights may illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.
∙ When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the
VDC system may not operate properly
indicator may flash or both
and the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate. Do not drive on these types of
roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface such
as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp,
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
Starting and driving 5-145
HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
WARNING
∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist
system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a
steep hill. Be especially careful when
stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy
roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from
rolling backwards may result in a loss of
control of the vehicle and possible serious
injury or death.
∙ The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill
on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when
the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
backwards and may result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
∙ The hill start assist system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards
on a hill under all load or road conditions.
Always be prepared to depress the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards. Failure to do so may result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
5-146 Starting and driving
FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM
When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill
start assist system automatically keeps the
brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle
from rolling backward in the time it takes the
driver to release the brake pedal and apply
the accelerator.
The hill start assist system will operate automatically under the following conditions:
∙ The transmission is shifted to a forward
or reverse gear.
∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill
by applying the brake. The maximum
holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and
the hill start assist system will stop operating completely.
The hill start assist system will not operate
when the shift lever is placed in the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level
road.
LSD2135
The sonar (parking sensor) system sounds a
tone to inform the driver of obstacles near
the bumper.
When the sonar system is turned on, the
sonar view will automatically appear in the
center display when the camera is activated.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the sonar system
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The sonar system is not a replacement for
proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles
or objects.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always look around and check that
it is safe to do so before parking.
∙ This function is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the
sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false
alarm.
CAUTION
SYSTEM OPERATION
The system informs with a visual and audible
signal of front obstacles when the shift lever
is in the D (Drive) position and both front and
rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R
(Reverse) position.
Sonar Operation Table
FR Sensor
Range
Sound
Display
When the object is detected, the indicator
(green) appears and blinks and the tone
sounds intermittently. When the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the color of the
indicator turns yellow and the rate of the
blinking increases. When the vehicle is very
close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.
RR Sensor
Sound
Display
P
x
†
x
†
R
o
o
o
o
N
x
†
x
†
D
o
o
x
†
o – Display/Beep when detect
† – Display on camera view
x – No Display and Beep
∙ Excessive noise (such as audio system
volume or an open vehicle window) will
interfere with the tone and it may not be
heard
The system is deactivated at speeds above
10 km/h (6 mph). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
∙ Keep the sonar sensors (located on the
bumper fascias) free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean
the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only
the corner sensor and the distance does not
change. The tone will stop when the obstacle
get away from the vehicle.
Starting and driving 5-147
LSD2136
When the corner of the vehicle moves closer
A
to an object, the corner sonar indicator 䊊
appears. When the center of the vehicle
moves close to an object, the center sonar (if
B appears.
so equipped) indicator 䊊
5-148 Starting and driving
LSD2137
A will appear when
The system indicators 䊊
the vehicle moves closer to an object.
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
SONAR SYSTEM
The system is automatically activated when
the ignition is in the ON position and the shift
lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system:
1. Press the SETTINGbutton on the control
panel and highlight the “Camera/Sonar”
key on the display using the INFINITI
controller then press the ENTER button.
2. Highlight the “Sonar” key then press the
ENTER button.
3. To turn the sonar system on or off, highlight the “Sonar” key and press the ENTER button. To enable the front sensors
only, highlight “FR Sensor Only” and
press the ENTER button.
NOTE:
The system will automatically be turned on
when the engine is restarted.
LSD2697
Starting and driving 5-149
SONAR LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the sonar system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Read and understand the limitations of
the sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may affect the
function of the sonar system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
∙ The system is deactivated at speeds
above 10 km/h (6 mph). It is reactivated
at lower speeds.
∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources
such as an automatic car wash, a truck’s
compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic
drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
∙ The system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not
detect small objects below the bumper or
on the ground.
5-150 Starting and driving
∙ The system may not detect the following
objects: fluffy objects such as snow,
cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc., or thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc., or
wedge-shaped objects.
∙ The system may not detect objects at
speeds above 5 km/h (3 mph) and may
not detect certain angular or moving
objects.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When sonar blockage is detected, the system
will be deactivated automatically.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog. The blocked condition
may also be caused by objects such as ice,
frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
LSD2135
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sonar sensors are located on the front
and rear bumpers. Always keep the area near
the sonar sensors clean.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing
the sonar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the sonar sensors.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
Do not attach stickers (including transparent
material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the sonar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the
sonar sensors. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer if the area around
the sonar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it
into the key hole, or use the INFINITI Intelligent Key.
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating
the vehicle. For additional information, refer
to “Changing engine coolant” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
temperature will drop below 0°C (32°F),
check the antifreeze to assure proper winter
protection. For additional information, refer
to “Engine cooling system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery
fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To
maintain maximum efficiency, the battery
should be checked regularly. For additional
information, refer to “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance of
these tires will be substantially reduced
in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,
INFINITI recommends the use of MUD &
SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all
four wheels. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some states, provinces and territories
prohibit their use. Check local laws before installing studded tires.
Starting and driving 5-151
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional
information, refer to “Tire chains” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items
be carried in the vehicle during winter:
∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows
and wiper blades.
∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
∙ Extra washer fluid to refill
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
the
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
∙ Wet ice (0°C, 32°F and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and very
hard to drive on. The vehicle will have
much less traction or “grip” under these
conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet
ice until the road is salted or sanded.
∙ Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even more
traction.
∙ Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
∙ Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise clear
road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is
seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try
not to brake while on the ice, and avoid
any sudden steering maneuvers.
∙ Do not use the cruise control on slippery
roads.
5-152 Starting and driving
∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases
under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of
the exhaust pipe and from around your
vehicle.
6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Towing recommended by INFINITI. . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . 6-16
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
The flashers will operate with the ignition
switch in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following
procedure:
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less than
1.5 seconds, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.
LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
∙ Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so
slowly that your vehicle might become a
hazard to other traffic.
∙ Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
6-2 In case of emergency
FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors
tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
When the low tire pressure warning light is lit,
and the “Tyre Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information display,
one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. If equipped, the system also
displays pressure of all tires (except the spare
tire) on the display screen by sending a signal
from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. If
the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of
it by the low tire pressure warning light. This
system will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 25 km/h (16 mph).
For additional information, refer to “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible reminders”
in the “Instruments and controls” section and
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to
a safe location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could
occur and may lead to an accident and
could result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four tires.
Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the tire placard to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
∙ When replacing a wheel without TPMS
such as the spare tire, TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire
sealant into the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Move the shift lever to
P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
In case of emergency 6-3
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and
to signal professional road assistance
personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) is shifted into P
(Park).
∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is on
a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.
LCE2142
A.
Blocks
B.
Flat tire
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat
tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when
it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
6-4 In case of emergency
LCE2407
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the liftgate and lift the luggage
board in the cargo area using the handle.
LCE2036
LCE2340
2. Remove the jack and tool kit cover by
lifting up using the handles.
It should not be necessary to remove or disloA
cate the Bose subwoofer (if so equipped) 䊊
B.
when removing the jack and tool kit cover 䊊
LCE2348
C by releasing the
3. Remove the tool kit 䊊
D.
Velcro straps 䊊
In case of emergency 6-5
NOTE:
Fully lower the spare tire below the vehicle
before attempting to remove the winch from
the spare tire.
9. After removing the spare tire from under
the vehicle, be sure to crank the cable up
by rotating the winch socket clockwise
to stow it.
10. Securely store the flat tire, tools and
jacking equipment in the vehicle.
CAUTION
LCE2350
4. Remove the jack.
E . To
∙ The jack is secured by a fastener 䊊
release the fastener, assemble the
F into the wheel nut
jacking rod䊊
G and rotate counterclockwrench 䊊
wise to release.
∙ Insert the flat end of the wheel nut
G into the slot of the fastener
wrench 䊊
E , and rotate counterclockwise to re䊊
lease the jack.
5. The lowering mechanism for the spare
tire is located on the passenger side of
H to
the cargo area. Remove the cover 䊊
access the lowering mechanism.
6-6 In case of emergency
LCE2351
I to
6. Attach the spare tire winch socket 䊊
the lowering mechanism nut.
7. To lower the spare tire, insert the wheel
G into the jacking rod 䊊
F
nut wrench 䊊
and insert the T-shaped end of the jackI and
ing rod into the winch socket 䊊
rotate counterclockwise.
8. Once the spare tire is lowered, release it
from the vehicle by guiding the lowering
cable and winch through the center of
the tire.
∙ Make sure safety cable is coiled above
spare tire when reinstalling spare
tire/wheel.
∙ When re-installing the spare tire under
the vehicle after use, be sure to secure it
with the tire stem facing down toward
the ground. If the spare tire is improperly
secured with the tire stem facing up towards the bottom of the vehicle, there is
an increased risk of separating from the
vehicle in the event of a crash which may
pose a hazard in traffic or risk of injury to
others.
Jacking up vehicle and removing
the damaged tire
WARNING
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it
with safety stands.
∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.
Always refer to the illustration for the correct
placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instructions.
∙ Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack
provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only
your vehicle during a tire change.
∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never use
any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.
∙ Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for
vehicles with limited slip differentials.
∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
In case of emergency 6-7
The jack should be used on firm and level
ground.
LCE2408
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns
by turning counterclockwise with the
wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the
wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.
6-8 In case of emergency
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
The jack-up points are indicated by
stamped arrows on the side of the
frame.
LCE2043
LCE0087
WCE0056
NOTE:
Installing the spare tire
If the lug nut wrench/jack handle contacts
the ground while raising the vehicle, disassemble the lug nut wrench from the jack extension rod, rotate it 90 degrees and reassemble.
The spare tire is designed for emergency use.
For additional information, refer to “Wheels
and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove
the tire.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
3. Install the assembled jack rod into the
jack as shown.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack
lever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle
until the tire clears the ground.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D,䊊
E )
sequence illustrated (䊊
until they are tight.
In case of emergency 6-9
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence illustrated
B, 䊊
C, 䊊
D, 䊊
E ). Lower the vehicle
A, 䊊
(䊊
completely.
WARNING
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to
become loose or come off. This could
cause an accident.
∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to
become loose.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km
(621 miles) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
113 N·m (83 ft-lb)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recommended
that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval.
6-10 In case of emergency
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After the vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1.6 km (1 mile).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire
Placard affixed to the driver side center pillar.
5. Securely store the flat tire, tools and
jacking equipment in the vehicle.
6. Close the liftgate.
WARNING
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire and
jacking equipment are properly secured
after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden
stop.
∙ The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
∙ When re-installing the spare tire under
the vehicle after use, be sure to secure it
with the tire stem facing down toward
the ground. If the spare tire is improperly
secured with the tire stem facing up towards the bottom of the vehicle, there is
an increased risk of separating from the
vehicle in the event of crash which may
pose a hazard in traffic or risk of injury to
others.
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below must
be followed.
WARNING
∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead
to a battery explosion, resulting in severe
injury or death. It could also damage your
vehicle.
∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always present
in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all
sparks and flames away from the
battery.
∙ Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any time.
Keep hands and other objects away from
it.
∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause
severe burns. If the fluid should come into
contact with anything, immediately flush
the contacted area with water.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of children.
∙ The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-11
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the
engine of the vehicle being jump started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, place the ignition
switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to
4 seconds before trying again.
LCE2223
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the
charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.
3. Ensure the vent caps are level and tight.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the seA,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D ).
quence illustrated (䊊
CAUTION
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to positive
(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift
bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air
conditioner, etc.).
∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not touch
moving parts in the engine compartment
and that the cable clamps do not contact
any other metal.
6-12 In case of emergency
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the
positive cable.
PUSH STARTING
CAUTION
∙ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be push-started or
tow-started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.
∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The threeway catalyst may be damaged.
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading
and the illumination of the engine oil pressure
message), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the
following steps.
WARNING
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never
remove the radiator cap while the engine is
still hot. When the radiator cap is removed,
pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,
apply the parking brake and move the
shift lever to P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum
hot and fan control to high speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the
engine.) Do not open the hood further
until no steam or coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or
loose, or the cooling fan does not run,
stop the engine.
WARNING
∙ Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling
fan can start at any time.
∙ If coolant is leaking, or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.
6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add
coolant to the engine coolant reservoir
tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
In case of emergency 6-13
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional
and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could
damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are
available from an INFINITI retailer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the
applicable laws and procedures for towing.
To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, INFINITI
recommends having a service operator tow
your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service
operator carefully read the following precautions:
WARNING
∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
∙ Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
∙ When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of
these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used.
∙ Always attach safety chains before
towing.
6-14 In case of emergency
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
INFINITI
INFINITI recommends towing your vehicle
based upon the type of drivetrain. Please refer to the diagrams in this section to ensure
that your vehicle is properly towed.
LCE2370
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models with
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)
INFINITI recommends that towing dollies be
used when towing your vehicle or place the
vehicle on a flatbed truck.
CAUTION
Never tow AWD models equipped with a
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
with any of the wheels on the ground as this
may cause serious and expensive damage to
the transfer case and transmission.
In case of emergency 6-15
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing
the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering
lock mechanism (for models with a
steering lock mechanism).
VEHICLE RECOVERY
(freeing a stuck vehicle)
LCE2371
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) models
with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck
as illustrated.
CAUTION
∙ Never tow CVT models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels on
the ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
∙ When towing CVT models with the rear
wheels on the ground or on towing
dollies:
6-16 In case of emergency
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal
injury or death when recovering a stuck
vehicle:
∙ Contact a professional towing service to
recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure.
∙ Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to main structural members of the
vehicle.
∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow
or free a stuck vehicle.
∙ Only use devices specifically designed for
vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
∙ Always pull the recovery device straight
out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull at an angle.
∙ Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except the
attachment point.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
∙ Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use a tow strap or other device designed
specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the
recovery device.
∙ Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
∙ Do not spin the tires above 55 km/h
(34 mph).
WARNING
∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed. This
could cause them to explode and result in
serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could
also overheat and be damaged.
∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
In case of emergency 6-17
MEMO
6-18 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Underbody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Cleaning interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Cleaning the seat tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Environmental factors influence the rate
of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your
vehicle, it is important to take proper care of
it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle as soon as you can:
∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.
∙ After driving on coastal roads.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a
mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general
purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean,
lukewarm (never hot) water.
CAUTION
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in the
detergent. Some car washes, especially
brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic
vehicle components, causing them to
crack. This could affect their appearance,
and also could cause them not to function
properly. Always check with your car
wash to confirm that acid is not used.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body cover.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight
or while the vehicle body is hot, as the
surface may become water-spotted.
∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface.
∙ When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must
be taken when removing caked-on dirt or
other foreign substances so the paint
surface is not scratched or damaged.
7-2 Appearance and care
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable
to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these
areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care
that the drain holes in the lower edge of the
door are open. Spray water under the body
and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and
wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove built-up
wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
An INFINITI retailer can assist you in choosing the proper product.
∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied
with the wax.
∙ Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that
may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from
the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are
available at an INFINITI retailer or any automotive accessory store. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for these
products.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up
and causing the acceleration of corrosion on
the underbody and suspension. Before the
winter period and again in the spring, the
underseal must be checked and, if necessary,
re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust
film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for
glass to become coated with a film after the
vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner
and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electrical
conductors, radio antenna elements or rear
window defogger elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
dampened in a mild soap solution, especially
during winter months in areas where road
salt is used. If not removed, road salt can
discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:
∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid
or alkali contents to clean the wheels.
∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.
∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
INFINITI does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating
to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the
rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires,
it may react with the coating and form a
compound. This compound may come off the
tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/
grooves.
∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by tire dressing manufacturer.
Appearance and care 7-3
CLEANING INTERIOR
This vehicle has new and unique surfaces on
the center console and door pull finishers. If
cleaning is required use mild soap and water.
However if mild soap and water won’t clean
the center console and door pull finishers, use
Genuine INFINITI Vinyl and Leather Cleaner
(or equivalent).
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe
the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean,
soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution,
then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order
to maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
fabric protectors contain chemicals that may
stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the
air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION
∙ Never use benzene, thinner, or any similar
material on the interior surfaces or surface damage may occur. Such damage is
not covered under the INFINITI
warranty.
∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and should
be removed promptly. Do not use saddle
soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents or ammoniabased cleaners as they may damage the
leather’s natural finish.
∙ Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage
the lens cover.
7-4 Appearance and care
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could
affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air
freshener, take the following precautions:
∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air
freshener in a location that allows it to
hang free and not contact an interior surface.
∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions before using the air fresheners.
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that
may result in a collision, injury or death:
∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front
position.
∙ Use only Genuine INFINITI floor mats
specifically designed for use in your vehicle model. For additional information,
contact an INFINITI retailer.
∙ Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning aid.
For additional information, refer to
"Floor mat positioning aid" in this
section.
The use of Genuine INFINITI floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular cleaning
and replaced if they become excessively
worn.
LAI2002
Bracket
LAI2003
∙ Two driver’s side front floor mat brackets.
Bracket positions
Genuine INFINITI floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The
floor mats have grommet holes incorporated
in them. Position each mat by placing the
floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat
grommet holes while centering the mat in the
floorwell.
∙ Two passenger’s side front floor mat
brackets.
Periodically check to make certain the mats
are properly positioned.
Floor mat positioning aid
This vehicle includes the following floor mat
positioning aids to help keep your floor mats
in place:
∙ One driver’s side second row floor mat
bracket.
∙ One passenger’s side second row floor
mat bracket.
Appearance and care 7-5
CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the
shade before using them. For additional information, refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in
the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since
these materials may severely weaken the
seat belt webbing.
CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS
CAUTION
Periodically clean the seat tracks to prevent reduction of ability to move the seats.
Clean periodically with a high-powered
vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may reduce
the ability to adjust the seat. A wet cleansing
agent may be used if necessary.
7-6 Appearance and care
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
∙ The accumulation of moisture-retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
∙ Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic collisions.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the
vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas
where the temperatures stay above freezing
and where atmospheric pollution exists and
road salt is used.
Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the
air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use
accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt
also accelerates the disintegration of paint
surfaces.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep
the vehicle clean.
∙ Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.
∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumulation.
∙ Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
water as soon as possible.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and
brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended that you consult an
INFINITI retailer.
CAUTION
∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris
from the passenger compartment by
washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt
with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
∙ Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
Appearance and care 7-7
MEMO
7-8 Appearance and care
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Explanation of general maintenance
items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Engine compartment check locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . 8-13
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Air conditioner filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Parking brake and brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Checking parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Checking brake pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Battery replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
INFINITI Intelligent Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your INFINITI has been designed to have
minimum maintenance requirements with
long service intervals to save you both time
and money. However, some day-to-day and
regular maintenance is essential to maintain
your INFINITI’s good mechanical condition,
as well as its emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as
general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the
maintenance chain.
Scheduled maintenance
For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your “INFINITI Service
and Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to
that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your INFINITI at regular intervals.
General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation. They are essential for
proper vehicle operation. It is your responsi-
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
bility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few
general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by
you, a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, an
INFINITI retailer.
Where to go for service
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and corrected by an INFINITI
retailer.
INFINITI technicians are well-trained specialists who are kept up-to-date with the
latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in-retailer training
programs. They are completely qualified to
work on INFINITI vehicles before they work
on your vehicle, rather than after they have
worked on it.
You can be confident that an INFINITI retailer’s service department performs the best job
to meet the maintenance requirements on
your vehicle — in a reliable and economical
way.
During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should be
performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause,
or it is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer to do it promptly. In addition, it is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer if you think that repairs are
required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in this section.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ” is found in this section.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time unless otherwise specified.
Doors and hood Check that all doors and the
hood operate smoothly as well as the back
door, trunk lid and hatch. Also make sure that
all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights,
tail lights, turn signal lights and other lights
are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check the aim of the headlights.
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. Adjust
the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to
the pressure specified. Check carefully for
damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire rotation* In the case that Two-Wheel
Drive (2WD) and front and rear tires are same
size; tires should be rotated every 10,000 km
(6,000 miles). Tires marked with directional
indicators can only be rotated between front
and rear. Make sure that the directional indicators point in the direction of wheel rotation
after the tire rotation is completed.
In the case that Four-Wheel Drive and All
Wheel Drive (4WD/AWD) and front and rear
tires are the same size; tires should be rotated
every 5,000 km (3,000 miles). Tires marked
with directional indicators can only be rotated between front and rear. Make sure that
the directional indicators point in the direction of wheel rotation after the tire rotation is
completed.
In the case that front tires are different size
from rear tires; tires cannot be rotated.
The timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and the road surface conditions.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components (if so equipped) Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal,
valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a
need for wheel alignment. If the steering
wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway
speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Repair as
necessary.
Wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if not
functioning correctly. Replace as necessary.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when
performing periodic maintenance, cleaning
the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the pedal
does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep
the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brake pedal* Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure that it is the proper
distance from the floor mat when depressed
fully. Check the brake booster function. Be
sure to keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Parking brake* Check the parking brake operation regularly. Check that the lever (if so
equipped) or the pedal (if so equipped) has
the proper travel. Also make sure that the
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill
when only the parking brake is applied.
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and
smoothly, and are installed securely. Check
the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or
damage.
Battery* (except for maintenance free batteries) Check the fluid level in each cell. The
fluid should be at the bottom of the filler
opening. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold. Make sure that the
coolant level is between the MAX and MIN
lines on the reservoir.
NOTE:
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
the vehicle (on level ground) and turning off
the engine.
Steering wheel Check for changes in the
steering condition, such as excessive play,
hard steering or strange noises.
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
Warning lights and chimes Make sure that all
warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery
power when the engine is not running
(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,
etc.).
Windshield defogger Check that the air
comes out of the defogger outlets properly
and in good quantity when operating the
heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and
that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time
you check the engine oil or refuel).
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.
Brake (and clutch) fluid level(s)* For Manual
Transmission (M/T) model; make sure that
the brake and clutch fluid levels are between
the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoirs.
Except for Manual Transmission (M/T)
model; make sure that the brake fluid level is
between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.
Engine drive belt(s)* Make sure the drive
belt(s) is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel,
oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle
has been parked for a while. Water dripping
from the air conditioner after use is normal. If
you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes
are evident, check for the cause and have it
corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines Check
the level when the fluid is cold with the engine
off. Check the lines for proper attachment,
leaks, cracks, etc.
Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care
to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following
are general precautions which should be
closely observed.
WARNING
∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply
the parking brake securely and block the
wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on
at any time without warning, even if the
ignition switch is in the OFF position and
the engine is not running. To avoid injury,
always disconnect the negative battery
cable before working near the fan.
∙ If you must run the engine in an enclosed
space such as a garage, be sure there is
proper ventilation for exhaust gases to
escape.
∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary
to work under the vehicle, support it with
safety stands.
∙ If you must work with the engine running,
keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools
away from moving fans, belts and any
other moving parts.
∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
∙ Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
∙ The fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer because the fuel lines
are under high pressure even when the
engine is off.
CAUTION
∙ Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil,
engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always
conform to local regulations for disposal
of vehicle fluid.
∙ Never leave the engine or continuously
variable transmission related component
harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
∙ Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those
items which are relatively easy for an owner
to perform.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any
servicing, it is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
VQ35DE engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11.
12.
13.
14.
LDI2498
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine coolant reservoir
Drive belt location
Fuse box
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Fuse box
Fuse/Fusible link box
Fuse/Fusible link box
Battery
Engine oil dipstick
Radiator cap
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
VQ35DD engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11.
12.
13.
14.
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine coolant reservoir
Drive belt location
Fuse box
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Fuse box
Fuse/Fusible link box
Fuse/Fusible link box
Battery
Engine oil dipstick
Radiator cap
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
LDI3012
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING
∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused by
high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait until the engine and radiator
cool down.
∙ Engine coolant is poisonous and should
be stored carefully in marked containers
out of the reach of children.
∙ If the engine was stopped soon when the
engine is still hot, the cooling fan may
operate for approximately one minute
after the engine was stopped to cool the
components in the engine compartment.
While the cooling fan is operating, be
sure that hands and other items do not
get caught in it.
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a high-quality, year-round, antifreeze coolant solution. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors,
therefore additional engine cooling system
additives are not necessary.
CAUTION
∙ Never use any cooling system additives
such as radiator sealer. Additives may
clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or
cooling system.
∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Engine
Coolant or equivalent in its quality with
the proper mixture ratio. Examples of the
mixture ratio of coolant and water are
shown below:
Outside
temperature
down to
LDI2519
Engine coolant
(concentrated)
Demineralized
or distilled
water
°C
°F
-15
5
30%
70%
-35
-30
50%
50%
The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap.
To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap or its equivalent
when replacement is required.
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
1 , add coolant to the MAX
the MIN level 䊊
2 . If the reservoir is empty, check the
level 䊊
coolant level in the radiator when the engine
is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the
radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to
the filler opening and also add it to the reser2 .
voir up to the MAX level 䊊
The engine coolant reservoir is a pressurized
tank. When installing the cap, tighten it until
a clicking sound is heard.
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
ENGINE OIL
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, it is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
For additional information on the location of
the engine coolant reservoir, refer to "Engine
compartment check locations" in this section.
∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of children
and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
An INFINITI retailer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be found
in the INFINITI Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.
WARNING
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
LDI2087
VQ35DE
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
∙ Never remove the radiator or engine
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
hot. Serious burns could be caused by
high pressure fluid escaping from the
radiator.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature.
∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon
as possible.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
LDI3014
VQ35DD
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the
oil level. It should be between the H
B . This is the
(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊
normal operating oil level range. If the oil
A , relevel is below the L (Low) mark 䊊
move the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not
C.
fill oil level above H (High) mark 䊊
6. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.
WDI0214
It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating
conditions.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.
LDI2622
VQ35DE
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain
B.
plug 䊊
B with a wrench
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊
by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove
and replace it at this time. For additional
information, refer to “Changing engine
oil filter” in this section.
∙ Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
∙ Check your local regulations.
WARNING
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with used
oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon
as possible.
LDI3013
VQ35DD
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature, then
turn it off.
A by turning it
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
counterclockwise.
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain
plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive
force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
34 N·m (25 ft-lb)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil
through the oil filler opening, then install
the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information on drain and
refill capacity, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends on
the oil temperature and drain time. Use
these specifications for reference only.
Always use the dipstick to determine
when the proper amount of oil is in the
engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage
around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter
B.
䊊
A from the right engine
4. Remove pins 䊊
protector located inside the right wheel
well, then remove protector. Remove oil
B with an oil filter wrench by turnfilter 䊊
ing it counterclockwise. Then remove
the oil filter by turning it by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface
with a clean rag.
CAUTION
∙ Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface
of the engine. Failure to do so could
lead to an oil leak and engine damage.
LDI2938
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
∙ The dipstick must be inserted in place
to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick
hole when filling the engine with oil.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil.
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional
2/3 turn.
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
POWER STEERING FLUID
CAUTION
WARNING
∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-3. Do not mix with other fluids.
Power steering fluid is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.
∙ Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will
damage the CVT, which is not covered by
the warranty.
CAUTION
∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is
required, we recommend an INFINITI retailer
for servicing.
∙ Use of a power steering fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent
will prevent the power steering system
from operating properly.
LDI2861
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
The fluid level should be checked when the
fluid is cold at fluid temperatures of 0 to
30ºC (32 to 86ºF). The fluid level can be
checked with the level gauge which is attached to the cap. To check the fluid level,
remove the cap. The fluid level should be
A and MIN 䊊
B lines.
between the MAX 䊊
B line, add
If the fluid is below the MIN 䊊
Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
BRAKE FLUID
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface with
water.
LDI2463
WARNING
∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid
may damage the brake system. The use of
improper fluids can damage the brake
system and affect the vehicle’s stopping
ability.
∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.
∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers out
of reach of children.
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
B , the brake
brake fluid is below the MIN line 䊊
warning light will illuminate. Add brake fluid
A . For additional inforup to the MAX line 䊊
mation on the recommended type of brake
fluid, refer to “Recommended fluids/
lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this
manual.
If the brake fluid must be added frequently,
the brake system should be thoroughly
checked by an INFINITI retailer.
For additional information on the location of
the brake fluid reservoir, refer to “Engine
compartment check locations” in this section.
LDI2583
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when
the low windshield-washer fluid warning
light comes on.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,
lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir
opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a
windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture
ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This
may result in damage to the paint.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concentrates
at full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid
concentrate and water.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
BATTERY
Caution symbols for battery
WARNING
1
䊊
No smoking, No exposed flames, No
Sparks
Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
2
䊊
Shield eyes
Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid.
3
䊊
Keep away from children
Never allow children to handle battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
4
䊊
Battery acid
5
䊊
Note operating instructions
6
䊊
Explosive gas
Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause
blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water
for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into
your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.
Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.
Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solution of baking soda and water.
∙ Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery
power when the engine is not running
(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,
etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.
WARNING
∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery which
can generate heat, reduce battery life,
and in some cases lead to an explosion.
∙ Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of children.
∙ Do not expose the battery to flames, an
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen
gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness
or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted
surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or
battery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the
acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing,
immediately flush with water for at least
15 minutes and seek medical attention.
WDI0224
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver
as shown. Use a cloth to protect the
battery case.
∙ When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
DRIVE BELT
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump
starting” in the “In case of emergency” section
of this manual. If the engine does not start by
jump starting, the battery may have to be
replaced. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
LDI2099
1.
2.
3.
4
Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley
Generator pulley
Air conditioner compressor pulley
Crankshaft pulley
WARNING
WDI0529
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom
of the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If
the belt is in poor condition or is loose,
have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
SPARK PLUGS
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with
the maintenance schedule found in your
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance
Guide”.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove
the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can
damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
SDI1895
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped
A spark plugs as frequently as conventional
䊊
type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”.
Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by
cleaning or regapping.
∙ Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
AIR CLEANER
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result in
serious injury.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner, push
A and pull the cover upward.
the tabs 䊊
LDI2553
WARNING
∙ Operating the engine with the air cleaner
filter off can cause you or others to be
burned. The air cleaner filter not only
cleans the intake air, it also stops the
flame if the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner is not installed and the engine
backfires, you could be burned. Never
drive with the air cleaner filter off. Be
cautious working on the engine when the
air cleaner is off.
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
The viscous paper type filter element (if so
equipped) should not be cleaned and reused.
The dry paper type filter element (if so
equipped) may be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter according to the maintenance log shown in a separate maintenance
booklet.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside
of the air cleaner housing and the cover with
a damp cloth.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner, make sure
the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing
A.
and latch the clips 䊊
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER
The air conditioner filter restricts the entry of
airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The
filter is located behind the glove box. For
additional information on change intervals,
refer to the “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”.
If replacement is required, it is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
CAUTION
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
∙ After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water.
If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace
the blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage
the windshield and impair driver vision.
LDI2757
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow the procedure below:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
B.
2. Push the release tab 䊊
A down and re3. Move the wiper blade 䊊
move.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place.
5. Push wiper on to windshield.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE PEDAL
Rear window wiper blade
If checking or replacement is required, it is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
WDI0293
CHECKING PARKING BRAKE
From the released position, firmly push the
parking brake down. If the number of clicks is
out of the range listed, it is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for service.
LDI2710
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful
D.
not to let wax get into the washer nozzle 䊊
This may cause clogging or improper
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets
into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
C.
small pin 䊊
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
∙ 5–6 clicks under depressing force of
196 N (44 lbs).
The front and rear disc-type brakes selfadjust every time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
Brake pad wear indicators
WDI0229
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL
With the engine running, check the distance A
between the upper surface of the pedal and
the metal floor. If it is out of the range shown,
it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for service.
Distance A: Under depression force of
490 N (110 lbs)
90 mm (3 1/2 in) or more
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, a high pitched scraping
or screeching sound will be heard when the
vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard
whether or not the brake pedal is depressed.
Have the brakes checked as soon as possible
if the wear indicator sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise
may be heard. Occasional brake noise during
light to moderate stops is normal and does
not affect the function or performance of the
brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should be
followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”.
BRAKE BOOSTER
Check the brake booster function as follows:
1. With the engine off, press and release
the brake pedal several times. When
brake pedal movement (distance of
travel) remains the same from one pedal
application to the next, continue on to
the next step.
2. While depressing the brake pedal, start
the engine. The pedal height should drop
a little.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine. Keep the pedal depressed for
about 30 seconds. The pedal height
should not change.
4. Run the engine for one minute without
depressing the brake pedal, then turn it
off. Depress the brake pedal several
times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as
the vacuum is released from the booster.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have
the brakes checked. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
FUSES
LDI2267
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse
box cover.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
LDI0456
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing
the tab and lifting the cover up.
A , replace it with a
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
B.
new fuse 䊊
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
The fuse puller is located in the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by an
INFINITI retailer.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate
and fuses are in good condition, check the
fusible links. If any of these fusible links are
melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN
parts.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.
LDI2092
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse
box cover.
LDI0456
A , replace it with an
4. If the fuse is open 䊊
B.
equivalent good fuse 䊊
5. Push the fuse box cover to install.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by an
INFINITI retailer.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
A
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊
B of the corner and twist it
into the slit 䊊
to separate the upper part from the
lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.
LDI2001
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
LDI2637
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or
equivalent.
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points
will seriously deplete the storage capacity.
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
C and 䊊
D.
䊊
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
If you need assistance with replacement, it is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Low power radio frequency devices:
– Manufacturer: Continental AG
– Country of origin: Germany
This device complies with SASO 1322/1997
"Low Power Radio Frequency Devices".
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) any interference received by the device must be accepted.
Any change or modification in the device
which may cause the device to operate outside the permitted limits of this standard
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
The concerned authorities have the right to
inspect the device and in case of complaints
of harmful interference caused by the device, it shall be liable to be forfeited.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
– Carrier frequency: 433.92 MHz
– Rated supply voltage and power source:
3V lithium battery
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
LIGHTS
HEADLIGHTS
FOG LIGHTS
For additional information on headlight bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
For additional information on fog light bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
Replacing the xenon headlight bulb
Replacing the LED fog light bulb
If replacement is required, it is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
If LED fog light bulb replacement is required,
it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
WARNING
cHIGH
VOLTAGE
When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric
shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights
replaced by a certified service technician.
For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly*
High/ Low
Park/Daytime running
Turn
Side marker
Door mirror turn signal light*
Front fog light
Map light*
Footwell light*
Personal light*
Glove box light*
Step light*
Courtesy light*
Puddle light*
Vanity mirror light*
Cargo light*
High-mounted stop light*
Rear combination light
Tail/Stop*
Turn
Rear side marker
Backup (reversing) assembly*
Backup
Tail
License plate light*
Always check with the Parts Department at an
INFINITI retailer for the latest parts information.
Wattage (W)
Bulb No.
35
—
28/8
—
—
—
8
3.4
8
—
3.8
—
—
—
8
—
D2S
—
7444NA
—
—
—
—
158
—
—
194
—
—
—
—
—
—
21
—
—
WY21W
—
18
—
5
921
—
W5W
* It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for replacement.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
1.
2
3
4
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Headlight assembly
Map light
Personal light
Step light
Door mirror turn signal light
Cargo light
License light
High-mounted stop light
Backup (reversing) assembly
Rear combination light
Puddle light
Fog light
WDI0263
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, light
and/or cover using a cloth and suitable tool.
Indicates bulb removal
LDI2941
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Indicates bulb installation
WHEELS AND TIRES
1 the
1. Remove the trim surrounding 䊊
housing.
2. Remove the two screws holding the as2 to the vehicle.
sembly 䊊
3 .
3. Remove the assembly 䊊
4.
4. Replace the necessary bulbs 䊊
If you have a flat tire, refer to ”Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric
medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical
equipment manufacturer for the possible
influences before use.
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
When the low tire pressure warning light (if
so equipped) is lit and the “Tyre Pressure Low
- Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle
information display, one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. If equipped,
the system also displays pressure of all tires
(except the spare tire) on the display screen
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel.
LDI2085
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h).
Rear combination light
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Also, this system may not detect a sudden
drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire
while driving).
For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this manual.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the spare)
often and always prior to long distance trips.
The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the tire placard under the
“Cold Tire Inflation Pressure” heading. The
tire placard is affixed to the driver side center
pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:
∙ Most tires naturally lose air over time.
∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when driven
over potholes or other objects or if the
vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be checked when
the tires are cold. The tires are considered
COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3
or more hours or driven less than 1.6 km
(1 mile) at moderate speeds.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
The TPMS with tire inflation indicator provides visual and audible signals outside the
vehicle for inflating the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. For additional
information, refer to “TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator ” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.
∙ Before taking a long trip, or whenever
you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire
pressure gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified level.
LDI2478
Tire placard
A
䊊
B
䊊
Tire size: The size of the tires originally
installed on the vehicle at the factory.
Tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this
pressure when the tires are cold. Tires
are considered COLD after the vehicle
has been parked for 3 or more hours, or
driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire
inflation is set by the manufacturer to
provide the best balance of tire wear and
vehicle handling characteristics based on
the vehicle’s GVWR.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much
air is added, press the core of the valve
stem briefly with the tip of the gauge
stem to release pressure. Recheck the
pressure and add or release air as
needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
Size
LDI2098
LDI0393
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto
the valve stem. Do not press too hard or
force the valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing of air escaping
from the tire is heard while checking the
pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
235/65R18
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
235/55R20
Spare Tire:
T165/90D18
Cold Tire
Inflation
Pressure
33 PSI, 230 kPa
35 PSI, 240 kPa
60 PSI, 420 kPa
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specification
shown on the tire placard.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
∙ When changing or replacing tires, be sure
all four tires are of the same type (i.e.,
Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. An INFINITI retailer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
∙ Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the low tire pressure
warning system.
∙ Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction and tread pattern on
all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles
which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential
gears.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
CAUTION
∙ ONLY use spare tires specified for the
AWD model.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with
tires of the same size, brand, construction
and tread pattern. The tire pressure and
wheel alignment should also be checked and
corrected as necessary. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
All season tires
INFINITI specifies All Season tires on some
models to provide good performance all year,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON
and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires
have better snow traction than All Season
tires and may be more appropriate in some
areas.
Summer tires
INFINITI specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on
dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rating
“M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or
icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the use
of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all
four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load rating
to the original equipment tires. If you do not,
it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not
match the potential maximum vehicle speed.
Never exceed the maximum speed rating of
the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some states,
provinces and territories prohibit their use.
Check local laws before installing studded
tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables should not be installed
on 235/55R20 size tires. Installation of the
tire chains/cables on 235/55R20 size tires
will cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan
to use tire chains/cables, you should install
235/65R18 size tires on your vehicle.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before
installing tire chains. When installing tire
chains, make sure they are the proper size for
the tires on your vehicle and are installed
according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” chains. Class
“S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted
tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use
Class “S” chains are designed to meet the
minimum clearances between the tire and the
closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a
winter traction device (tire chains or cables).
The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types
may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain
manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end
links of the tire chain must be secured or
removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive
at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle
may be damaged and/or vehicle handling
and performance may be adversely affected.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
WDI0258
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
INFINITI recommends rotating the tires every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) for 2WD vehicles and 5,000 km (3,000 miles) for AWD
vehicles.
For additional information on tire replacing
procedures, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
113 N·m (83 ft-lb)
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specifications at all times. It is recommended
that wheel nuts be tightened to specification
at each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
∙ Tires should be periodically inspected for
wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught
in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
WARNING
∙ After rotating the tires, check and adjust
the tire pressure.
∙ The original tires have built-in tread wear
indicators. When the wear indicators are
visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km
(600 miles) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
∙ Do not include the spare tire in the tire
rotation.
∙ Incorrect tire selection, fitting, care or
maintenance can affect vehicle safety
with risk of accident and injury.
∙ If in doubt, consult an INFINITI retailer or
the tire manufacturer.
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.
∙ Before taking a long trip, or whenever
you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire
pressure gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified level.
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
WDI0259
Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
∙ Tires degrade with age and use. Have
tires, including the spare, over 6 years old
checked by a qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be obvious.
Replace the tires as necessary to prevent
tire failure and possible personal injury.
∙ Improper service of the spare tire may
result in serious personal injury. If it is
necessary to repair the spare tire, contact an INFINITI retailer.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load carrying
capacity as originally equipped. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires”
in the “Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, biasbelted or radial), or tread patterns can
adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, VDC system, ground clearance,
body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight
aim and bumper height. Some of these
effects may lead to accidents and could
result in serious personal injury.
∙ If the wheels are changed for any reason,
always replace with wheels which have
the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a
different off-set could cause premature
tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system
and/or interference with the brake discs.
Such interference can lead to decreased
braking efficiency and/or early brake
pad wear. For additional information on
wheel off-set dimensions, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately
one minute. The light will remain on after
one minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired.
Such wheels or tires could have structural
damage and could fail without warning.
∙ The use of retread
recommended.
tires
is
not
Wheel balance
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.
∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is
not handled correctly. Be careful when
handling the TPMS sensor.
Care of wheels
∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID
registration may be required. Contact an
INFINITI retailer for ID registration.
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by INFINITI. The valve stem cap
may become stuck.
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be
clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure.
∙ Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when
the wheel is changed or the underside of
the vehicle is washed.
∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss
of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
∙ INFINITI recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire)
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS
such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not
function.
Observe the following precautions if the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be
used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:
WARNING
∙ The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced with
the standard tire at the first opportunity
to avoid possible tire or differential
damage.
∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at
speeds faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
∙ When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used on
the front wheels (drive wheels).
∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
than the standard tire. Replace the spare
tire as soon as the tread wear indicators
appear.
∙ Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at the
same time.
∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not
fit properly and may cause damage to the
vehicle.
∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original tire,
ground clearance is reduced. To avoid
damage to the vehicle, do not drive over
obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle
through an automatic car wash since it
may get caught.
9 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . .9-2
Fuel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
When traveling or registering in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate . . . . . .9-8
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Certification plate
(For Gulf standard models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described
in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type
Capacity (approximate)
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
74 L
19-1/2 gal
16-1/4 gal
With oil
filter change
4.8 L
5-1/8 qt
4-1/4 qt
Without oil
filter change
4.5 L
4-3/4 qt
4 qt
Fuel
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
*1: For additional information,
refer to “Engine oil” in the
“Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
Engine coolant
(with reservoir)
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid
9-2 Technical and consumer information
• For additional information, refer to “Fuel Information” in this section.
For Mexico
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil Ester 5W-30 SN” is recommended.
Except for Mexico
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.
• If above motor oil is not available, use “NISSAN Motor Oil”
equivalent that matches the following grade and viscosity.
• Oil grade: API SM or SN, ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5
• SAE Viscosity: For additional information, refer to “Recommended
SAE viscosity number” in this section.
9.6 L
2-1/2 gal
2-1/8 gal
• Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) or equivalent.
• Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in tis quality, in
order to avoid possible aluminum corrosion within the engine cooling
system caused by the use of non-genuine engine coolant. Note that
any repairs for the incidents within the engine cooling system while
using non-genuine engine coolant may not be covered the warranty
even if such incidents occurred during the warranty period.
—
—
—
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission fluid
other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the CVT,
which is not covered by the warranty.
Fluid type
Capacity (approximate)
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Imperial
Measure
Differential gear oil
—
—
—
• Genuine NISSAN Diff Oil Hypoid Super semi-synthetic GL-5
75W-90
• Use Genuine NISSAN Diff Oil Hypoid Super semi-synthetic GL-5.
Using differential gear oil other than Genuine NISSAN Diff Oil Hypoid
Super semi-synthetic GL-5 will damage the differential gear, which is
not covered by the warranty.
Transfer fluid
—
—
—
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or
equivalent (mineral oil)
Power Steering Fluid (PSF)
—
—
—
• Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent.
• Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF will
prevent the power steering system from operating properly.
For Mexico
• Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid, or equivalent DOT 3 or DOT 4
• Never mix different types of fluids (DOT 3 and DOT 4)
Except for Mexico
• Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid, or equivalent DOT 3
Brake fluid
—
—
—
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
• NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant
—
—
—
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system
refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
Air conditioning system oil
—
—
—
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil DH-PS or equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system
refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
5L
1-3/8 gal
1-1/8 gal
Windshield-washer fluid
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze fluid or equivalent
Technical and consumer information 9-3
FUEL INFORMATION
CAUTION
Do not use leaded gasoline. using leaded
gasoline will damage the three-way
catalyst.
For Mexico
Use UNLEADED PREMIUM gasoline with
an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (AntiKnock Index) number (Research octane number 96).
Except for Mexico
Use UNLEADED PREMIUM gasoline with
an octane rating of at least 95 (RON)
If unleaded premium is not used, UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 91 (RON) may be used at
slightly reduced performance. However, for
maximum vehicle performance and the best
driveability, the use of unleaded premium is
recommended.
If unleaded premium is not used, UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
number (Research octane number of 91) may
be used at slightly reduced performance.
However, for maximum vehicle performance
and the best driveability, the use of unleaded
premium is recommended.
STI0732
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY
NUMBER
Except for Mexico:
0W-20 is preferable.
9-4 Technical and consumer information
If 0W-20 is not available, select the viscosity
from the chart that is suitable for the outside
temperature range.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer when servicing your air conditioner
system.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your INFINITI
vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN
A/C system oil DH-PS or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement
of all air conditioner system components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
INFINITI vehicle does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
government regulations require the recovery
and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. An
INFINITI retailer has the trained technicians
and equipment needed to recover and recycle
your air conditioner system refrigerant.
Technical and consumer information 9-5
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
VQ35DE/VQ35DD
Type
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement
6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order
mm (in) 95.5 x 81.4 (3.760 x 3.205)
cm3 (cu in) 3,498 (213.45)
1–2–3–4–5–6
Idle speed
CVT (in “N” position)
No adjustment is necessary.
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation
Maximum vehicle speed (for Gulf Standard Models)
FXE22HR-11
mm (in) 1.1 (0.043)
Timing chain
km/h (mph) 190 (118)
Maximum vehicle speed:
Gulf Standard regulation requires automobile manufacturers to indicate the maximum vehicle speed for applicable models. The maximum vehicle speed, listed above,
is the measured speed under certain testing conditions. The actual value may differ according to the vehicle usage and road and environmental conditions.
INFINITI recommends you to ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions.
9-6 Technical and consumer information
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel Type
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Offset in (mm)
Size
1.97 (50)
18 x 7.5 J
1.97 (50)
20 x 7.5 J
Tire type
Performance type
Size
Passenger
All season
Alloy
235/65R18
235/55R20
Spare wheel type
Wheel Size
Tire Size
Space saver
18 x4T
T165/90D18
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
without roof rack
with roof rack
Front and rear track
Wheelbase
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear
mm (in)
mm (in)
5,075 (199.8)
1,960 (77.2)
mm (in)
mm (in)
mm (in)
mm (in)
kg (lbs.)
1,742 (68.6)
1,813 (71.4)
1,670 (65.7)
2,900 (114.2)
2,715 (5,986)
kg (lbs.)
kg (lbs.)
1,325 (2,921)
1,415 (3,120)
Technical and consumer information 9-7
WHEN TRAVELING OR
REGISTERING IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
When planning to drive your INFINITI vehicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your
vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gasoline
vehicles must be operated with unleaded
gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle
to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards vary
according to the country, state, province or
district; therefore, vehicle specifications may
differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another
country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation,
and registration are the responsibility of the
user. INFINITI is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.
9-8 Technical and consumer information
TI1050M
LTI2028
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN) PLATE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (chassis number)
The VIN plate is located as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is
used in the vehicle registration.
The vehicle identification number is located
as shown.
The VIN number is also available through the
center display screen. For additional information, refer to your “INFINITI InTouch™ Owner’s Manual”.
LTI2133
VQ35DE engine
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
LTI2255
VQ35DD engine
WTI0172
CERTIFICATION PLATE
(For Gulf standard models)
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.
Technical and consumer information 9-9
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
LTI2251
TIRE PLACARD
The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire
placard. The tire placard is located as shown.
9-10 Technical and consumer information
WTI0173
LTI2237
AIR CONDITIONER
SPECIFICATION LABEL
1. Find the centerline of the vehicle and
measure down 1.5 in (37.5 mm). Mark
the location on the fascia.
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown.
A in the
2. Drill a 0.39 in (10 mm) hole 䊊
fascia.
LTI2248
Type A (if so equipped)
3. Hold the license plate bracket to the fasB.
cia and mark two locations 䊊
4. Remove the license plate bracket and
drill two 0.39 in (10 mm) holes in the
locations marked in the previous step.
LTI2238
Type B (if so equipped)
LTI2249
Type A (if so equipped)
C into the
5. Insert two screw grommets 䊊
fascia.
6. Install the license plate bracket to the
D.
fascia with two screws 䊊
Technical and consumer information 9-11
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING
∙ It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
TERMS
LTI2239
Type B (if so equipped)
It is important to familiarize yourself with the
following terms before loading your vehicle:
∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard
and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This
weight does not include passengers and
cargo.
∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.
∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The maximum total combined weight of
the vehicle, passengers, cargo and any
other optional equipment.
9-12 Technical and consumer information
∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for
the front or rear axle.
∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) The maximum total combined weight of
the vehicle, passengers, cargo and the
trailer.
∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight
limit specified of the load (passengers
and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the
maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo that can be loaded into the
vehicle.
∙ Cargo capacity - permissible weight of
cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that
you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
To get “the combined weight of occupants
and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants,
then add the total luggage weight, as shown
in the following illustration.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX lbs. or XXX kg” on your
vehicle’s certification label.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX lbs. or
XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5
X 150) = 650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70)
= 300 kg.)
LTI2320
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Example
Technical and consumer information 9-13
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that
you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Measurement of
weights” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, refer to
“Tire placard” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.
∙ The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in the
cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo
area. Your child could be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the top tether
strap is damaged.
LIC3684
Cargo area luggage hooks
SECURING THE LOAD
There are luggage hooks located in the cargo
area as shown. The hooks can be used to
secure cargo with ropes or other types of
straps.
When securing items using luggage hooks
located on the side finisher do not apply a
load over more than 29 N (6.5 lbs.) to a single
hook.
The luggage hooks that are located on the
floor should have loads less than 490 N
(110 lbs.) to a single hook.
9-14 Technical and consumer information
∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the GVWR or the maximum front and
rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur,
or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
LOADING TIPS
∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR.
∙ Do not load the front and rear axle to the
GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the GVWR or the maximum front and
rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur,
or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.
∙ Overloading not only can shorten the life
of your vehicle and the tire, but can also
cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer
braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a
serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts
that could affect the balance of your vehicle.
When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale
and weigh the front and the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads. Individual
axle loads should not exceed either of the
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total
of the axle loads should not exceed the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR). If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to
bring all weights below the ratings.
Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Traction AA, A, B and C
Temperature A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat build-up and possible tire failure.
9-16 Technical and consumer information
10 Index
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . .1-5, 1-7
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-54
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-13
Air bag warning light,
supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-13
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . .4-34
Air conditioner specification label . . .9-10
Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . .9-5
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-34
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . .4-42
Alarm system (See
vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-151
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . .2-9
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . .5-141
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Around View® Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Automatic
Automatic drive positioner . . .3-37, 3-39
Automatic power window switch . . .2-64
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . .3-33
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Automatic drive positioner . . . . .3-37, 3-39
Brake wear indicators . . . . . .2-15, 8-23
Parking brake check . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-23
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-142
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-141
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132
Brightness control
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . .2-8
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
B
Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) . . . .5-60
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-151, 8-16
Charge warning light. . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
INFINITI Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . .8-26
Key fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-17
Belt (See drive belt). . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI) . . . . . . .5-48
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . .5-38
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . .5-141
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-29
Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22, 8-23
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-141
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
C
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Cargo area storage bin . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
Cargo (See vehicle loading information). .9-12
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Check engine indicator light (See
malfunction indicator lamp) . . . . . . . . .2-14
Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Child restraints . . . . .1-19, 1-20, 1-26, 1-28
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . .1-26, 1-33, 1-38, 1-43
Top tether strap anchor point
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-30
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . .2-54
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4
Climate control seat switch . . . . . . . . .2-45
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-151
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Controls
Heater and air conditioner controls. . .4-34
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . .8-9
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . .8-8
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . .2-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
D
Daytime Running Light System . . . . . . .2-43
Defogger Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . .2-44
Distance Control Assist (DCA) system . . .5-99
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . .3-37, 3-39
10-2
Driving
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . .5-151
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Precautions when starting
and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-10
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Dual panel moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Dual power moonroof . . . . . . . . .2-67, 2-67
E
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-133
Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-15, 6-2
Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-17
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . .8-9
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-12
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine compartment check locations . .8-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . .2-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . . . .2-6
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . .5-4
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . . .8-2
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
F
Flashers (See
hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . . . .6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Floor mat positioning aid. . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-14
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system . . . .2-10, 5-112
Front air bag system (See
supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . .1-54
Front and rear sonar system . . . . . . . .5-147
Front-door pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-3
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-133
Fuel-filler door and cap. . . . . . . . . .3-30
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-28
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Fusible links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
G
Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . .2-73, 2-74, 2-75, 2-76, 2-77
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . .2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
H
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-39
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Heated 2nd row seat switches . . . . . . .2-47
Heated rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Heater
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Heater and air conditioner controls. . .4-34
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Heater and air conditioner (automatic). . .4-33
Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . .5-146
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . .2-73, 2-74, 2-75, 2-76, 2-77
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Hook
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Remote keyless entry operation .
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . .
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.3-14
.3-17
.3-17
.2-71
.1-28
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11, 8-18
I
K
Ignition switch
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-13
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-133
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 2-13
INFINITI Drive Mode Selector. . . . . . . .5-24
INFINITI Intelligent Key System. . . . .3-2, 3-7
Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 3-4, 5-16
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . .3-33
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-44
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . .2-44
Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . .5-133
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) . . . . . . .5-78
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-25
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-14
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . . .9-10
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . .9-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . .1-65
Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27, 5-32, 5-35
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27, 5-32, 5-35
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
10-3
License plate
Installing the license plate . . . . . . . .9-10
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Light
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . .1-65, 2-13
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-29
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-8
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-29
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-39
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-39
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-10
Low windshield-washer fluid
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-57
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 2-13
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Map lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . .3-6
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-28
Low tire pressure warning light .
Low windshield-washer fluid
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage rack (see roof rack). . .
Luggage (See
vehicle loading information) . . .
. . . . . .2-10
. . . . . .2-28
. . . . . .2-61
. . . . . .2-62
. . . . . .9-12
M
Maintenance
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-5
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . .8-4
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) . . . . . .2-14
Map lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37, 3-39
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Instrument brightness control . . . . . .2-44
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-33
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-27
O
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
10-4
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-12
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-13
P
Parking
Parking brake check . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-23
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-137
Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Parking brake and brake pedal. . . .8-22, 8-23
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Power
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52, 2-53
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-140
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
Power inverter switch. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52, 2-53
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-140
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Precautions
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-5
On-pavement and off-road
driving
precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Precautions on booster
seats. . . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-33, 1-38, 1-43
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . .1-26, 1-33, 1-38, 1-43
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-16
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Precautions when starting
and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-10
Predictive Forward Collision Warning
(PFCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-121
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Rain-sensing auto wiper system . . . . . .2-36
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA). . . . . . .5-68
Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . .2-31, 2-32, 2-50
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
Rear window and outside mirror
defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Rear window wiper and washer switches .2-37
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . .9-5
Registering a vehicle in another country . . .9-8
Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . .3-6
Child seat belts . . .1-26, 1-33, 1-38, 1-43
Seat adjustment
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . .1-3
Second row bench seats . . . . . . .1-5, 1-7
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Seat belt
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-20
Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-16
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16, 7-6
Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-21
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-19, 2-12
Seats
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . .1-5, 1-7
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Automatic drive positioner . . . .3-37, 3-39
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Seats/floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Security system
(INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 3-4, 5-16
Security systems
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Spark plug replacement. . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65
Stability control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-143
Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-17
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11, 8-18
Precautions when starting
and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-10
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Steering
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-140
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . .1-65
Supplemental air bag warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-13
Supplemental front impact air bag
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-54
10-5
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . .
Precautions on supplemental
restraint system . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . .
Switch
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic power window switch.
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard warning flasher switch . .
Headlight and turn signal switch .
Headlight control switch . . . . . .
Instrument brightness control . . .
Power door lock switch . . . . . .
Power inverter switch. . . . . . . .
Rear window wiper and
washer switches . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)
off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .1-65
. . .1-47
. . .1-47
. . .2-40
. . .2-64
. . .2-45
. . . .6-2
. . .2-39
. . .2-39
. . .2-44
.3-5, 3-6
. . .2-51
. . .2-37
. . .2-44
. . .2-49
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . .2-6
Theft
(INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 3-4, 5-16
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-38
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
10-6
Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32, 9-10
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31, 8-31
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . .9-15
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . .8-31, 9-7
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-10
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-30
Towing
4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-137
Towing load/specification . . . . . . .5-138
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-137
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-137
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Transceiver
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . .2-73, 2-74, 2-75, 2-76, 2-77
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Travel (See registering a vehicle in
another country). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-15
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . .9-7
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)
off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-143
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .5-143
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . .9-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-8
Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16, 6-17
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
(INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 3-4, 5-16
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
W
Warning
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . .1-65, 2-13
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . .2-9
Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-10
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Distance Control Assist (DCA). . . . . .5-99
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2
Lane Departure
Prevention . . . . . . . . .5-27, 5-32, 5-35
Lane Departure
Warning light . . . . . . . .5-27, 5-32, 5-35
Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-28
Low fuel warning light . . . . . .2-12, 2-28
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-10
Low windshield-washer fluid
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-57
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-19, 2-12
Supplemental air bag
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-13
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 2-13
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . .1-65
Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 2-13
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 2-13
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 2-13
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 2-13
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 2-13
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Warning systems switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and
washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . .9-7
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31, 9-7
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
When traveling or registering in
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Locking passengers' windows . . . . . .2-63
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Windshield wiper blades . .
Wiper
Rear window wiper and
washer switches . . . . .
Wiper blades . . . . . . .
Wiper and washer switch .
. . . . . . . . .8-21
. . . . . . . . .2-37
. . . . . . . . .8-21
. . . . . . . . .2-35
10-7
MEMO
MEMO
GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL INFORMATION:
CAUTION
Do not use leaded gasoline. using leaded
gasoline will damage the three-way
catalyst.
For Mexico
Use UNLEADED PREMIUM gasoline with
an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (AntiKnock Index) number (Research octane number 96).
If unleaded premium is not used, UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
number (Research octane number of 91) may
be used at slightly reduced performance.
However, for maximum vehicle performance
and the best driveability, the use of unleaded
premium is recommended.
Except for Mexico
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
Use UNLEADED PREMIUM gasoline with
an octane rating of at least 95 (RON)
For additional information, refer to the tire
placard.
If unleaded premium is not used, UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 91 (RON) may be used at
slightly reduced performance. However, for
maximum vehicle performance and the best
driveability, the use of unleaded premium is
recommended.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar. For additional information, refer
to “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
During the first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) of
vehicle use, follow the break-in procedures
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Break-in schedule” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or
shortened engine life.
For Mexico
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil Ester 5W-30
SN”
Except for Mexico
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”
For additional information, refer to “Recommended SAE viscosity number” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
Printing : October 2017
Publication No.: OM18EA 0L50G0
Printed in the U.S.A.
L-50A
Download PDF

advertising